Allen-Bradley MicroLogix™ 1100 1763 Programmable Controller, 1762 Expansion I/O User Manual

MicroLogix 1100
Programmable
Controllers
Bulletin 1763 Controllers and 1762
Expansion I/O
User Manual
Important User Information
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of
electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the Application,
Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (publication SGI-1.1
available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com) describes some important
differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical
devices. Because of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of
uses for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this
equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this
equipment is acceptable.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for
indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of
this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative
purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with
any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume
responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to
use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without
written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc., is prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware
of safety considerations.
WARNING
IMPORTANT
ATTENTION
Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause
an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal
injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Identifies information that is critical for successful application and
understanding of the product.
Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead
to: personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize
the consequence.
SHOCK HAZARD
Labels may be on or inside the equipment, such as a drive or motor, to
alert people that dangerous voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD
Labels may be on or inside the equipment, such as a drive or motor, to
alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures.
Rockwell Automation, DeviceNet, ModBus, Allen-Bradley, SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, PLC-5, MicroLogix, SLC 500, RSLogix, RSLinx, and
RSLogix 500 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Table of Contents
Preface
Who Should Use this Manual. . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Techniques Used in this Manual .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 9
. 9
10
10
Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Component Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MicroLogix 1100 Memory Module and Built-in Real-Time
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1762 Expansion I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
12
Chapter 1
Hardware Overview
12
13
14
14
15
16
Chapter 2
Installing Your Controller
3
Agency Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compliance to European Union Directives . . . . . .
EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazardous Location Considerations . . . . . . . .
Disconnecting Main Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit .
Power Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolation Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Inrush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loss of Power Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input States on Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Types of Line Conditions . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventing Excessive Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Control Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Emergency-Stop Switches . . . . . . . . . . .
Schematic (Using IEC Symbols) . . . . . . . . . . .
Schematic (Using ANSI/CSA Symbols). . . . . . .
Installing a Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Battery Wire Connector . . . . .
Controller Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller and Expansion I/O Spacing . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIN Rail Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19
19
20
20
20
21
21
22
23
23
23
24
24
24
24
25
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
34
35
36
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
4
Table of Contents
Panel Mounting . . . . . . . . . .
1762 Expansion I/O Dimensions
Mounting 1762 Expansion I/O . .
DIN Rail Mounting . . . . . . . .
Panel Mounting . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Expansion I/O . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
37
38
38
38
39
40
Wiring Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Surge Suppressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Surge Suppressors . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Block Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal Groupings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sinking and Sourcing Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . .
1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA, 1763-L16BBB and
1763-L16DWD Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller I/O Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimizing Electrical Noise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Your Analog Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Channel Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimizing Electrical Noise on Analog Channels .
Grounding Your Analog Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expansion I/O Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
43
43
44
45
47
48
49
49
51
52
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
52
55
55
55
55
56
57
58
58
63
Supported Communication Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Communication Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Communications Toggle Functionality . . . . . .
Changing Communication Configuration. . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making a DF1 Point-to-Point Connection . . . . . . . . .
Using a Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to a DF1 Half-Duplex Network . . . . . . . .
Connecting to a DH-485 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DH-485 Configuration Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DH-485 Communication Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Communication Cable to the DH-485
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
71
72
72
73
77
78
78
80
83
83
85
85
Chapter 3
Wiring Your Controller
Chapter 4
Communication Connections
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
. . . 86
Table of Contents
Grounding and Terminating the DH-485 Network .
Connecting the AIC+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended User-Supplied Components . . . . . .
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install and Attach the AIC+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Powering the AIC+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to DeviceNet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5
87
88
90
92
94
94
95
97
97
98
98
Chapter 5
Using the LCD
Operating Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Startup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Menu and Default Screen. . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Menus to Choose Values. . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Between Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . .
Cursor Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing I/O Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring Bit File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Target Bit File Number (TBF) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring a Bit File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring Integer File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Target Integer File Number (TIF) . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring an Integer File . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Mode Switch Position . . . . . . . . . .
Using a User Defined LCD Screen . . . . . . . . . . .
User Defined LCD Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Key In Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key In Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Key In Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Communications Toggle Functionality . . .
Viewing Ethernet Port Configuration . . . . . . . . .
Using Trim Pots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trim Pot Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Data Value of a Trim Pot. . . . . . . .
Trim Pot Configuration in LCD Function File.
Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
102
103
104
106
106
107
107
108
109
110
111
111
113
117
117
119
125
125
126
128
129
131
131
131
132
134
134
136
136
136
138
138
139
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
6
Table of Contents
Viewing Fault Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Chapter 6
Using Real-Time Clock and
Memory Modules
Real-Time Clock Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation at Power-up and Entering a Run or
Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writing Data to the Real-Time Clock. . . . . . . .
RTC Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Program , User Data and Recipe Back-up
Program Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data File Download Protection. . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Module Write Protection . . . . . . . . . .
Removal/Insertion Under Power. . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Module Information File . . . . . . . . . .
Program /Data Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program /Data Upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 143
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
143
144
144
145
145
145
146
146
146
146
147
147
Overview of Online Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online Editing Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effects of Online Editing On Your System . . . . . . . .
System Impacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Table File Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Online Edit Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directions and Cautions for MicroLogix 1100 Online
Edit User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the RSLinx "Configure CIP Option"
(OS Series A FRN 1,2, and 3 only) . . . . . . . . . . .
A Download Before Starting Online Edit . . . . . . .
Types of Online Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Functions in Runtime Online Editing . . . . . .
Edit Functions in Program Online Editing . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
149
150
152
152
152
152
Chapter 7
Online Editing
. . . . . 153
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
153
154
156
157
157
Appendix A
Specifications
Expansion I/O Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Digital I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Appendix B
Replacement Parts
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
MicroLogix 1100 Replacement Kits.
Lithium Battery (1763-BA) . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Handling . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
183
184
184
185
185
Table of Contents
Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1762 Expansion I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expansion I/O Replacement Doors. . . . .
Expansion I/O Replacement DIN Latches
Expansion I/O Replacement Door Labels
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
185
187
188
188
188
188
Understanding the Controller Indicator Status. . . . . . . . .
Controller Status LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status Indicators on the LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Status Indicators on the LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Error Recovery Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Expansion I/O Diagnostics and Troubleshooting.
Module Operation and Channel Operation . . . . . . . .
Power-up Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Critical and Non-Critical Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Error Definition Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling Rockwell Automation for Assistance . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
189
189
190
191
191
191
193
194
194
194
195
195
197
198
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
199
199
200
200
201
RS-232 Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-485 Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DF1 Full-Duplex Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DF1 Half-Duplex Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DF1 Half-Duplex Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations When Communicating as a DF1 Slave
on a Multi-drop Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Modems with MicroLogix 1100 Programmable
Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DH-485 Communication Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DH-485 Configuration Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Devices that use the DH-485 Network . . . . . . . . . . .
Important DH-485 Network Planning Considerations.
Example DH-485 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
203
203
203
204
205
Appendix C
Troubleshooting Your System
Appendix D
Using Control Flash to Upgrade
Your Operating System
Preparing for Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install ControlFlash Software . . . . .
Prepare the Controller for Updating
Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .
Missing/Corrupt OS LED Pattern . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Appendix E
Connecting to Networks via
RS-232/RS-485 Interface
. . 206
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
207
209
209
210
210
215
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
8
Table of Contents
Modbus Communication Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Appendix F
Connecting to Networks via
Ethernet Interface
MicroLogix 1100 Controllers and Ethernet Communication .
MicroLogix 1100 Performance Considerations. . . . . . . . . . .
MicroLogix 1100 and PC Connections to the
Ethernet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Network Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting an Ethernet switch on the Ethernet Network
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplicate IP address Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Ethernet Channel on the MicroLogix 1100 .
Configuration Using RSLogix 500 Programming Software . .
Configuration Via BOOTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Rockwell BOOTP/DHCP Utility . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a DHCP Server To Configure Your Processor . . . . . .
Using Subnet Masks and Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manually Configuring Channel 1 for Controllers on
Subnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MicroLogix 1100 Embedded Web Server Capability . . . . . .
219
220
221
222
222
223
225
226
227
229
229
230
232
233
234
235
Appendix G
System Loading and Heat
Dissipation
System Loading Calculations. . . . . . . . . .
System Loading Example Calculations
System Loading Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating Heat Dissipation . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary
Index
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
237
238
240
240
242
Preface
Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual. It
provides information concerning:
•
•
•
•
•
Who Should Use this
Manual
who should use this manual
the purpose of this manual
related documentation
conventions used in this manual
Rockwell Automation support
Use this manual if you are responsible for designing, installing,
programming, or troubleshooting control systems that use
MicroLogix™ 1100 controllers.
You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and
familiarity with relay logic. If you do not, obtain the proper training
before using this product.
Purpose of this Manual
This manual is a reference guide for MicroLogix 1100 controllers and
expansion I/O. It describes the procedures you use to install, wire,
and troubleshoot your controller. This manual:
• explains how to install and wire your controllers
• gives you an overview of the MicroLogix 1100 controller system
Refer to publication 1763-RM001, MicroLogix 1100 Programmable
Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual for the MicroLogix 1100
instruction set and for application examples to show the instruction
set in use. Refer to your RSLogix 500 programming software user
documentation for more information on programming your
MicroLogix 1100 controller.
9
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
10
Related Documentation
The following documents contain additional information concerning
Rockwell Automation products. To obtain a copy, contact your local
Rockwell Automation office or distributor.
Resource
Description
MicroMentor: Understanding and Applying Micro
Programmable Controllers 1761-MMB
Information on understanding and applying micro controllers.
MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction
Set Reference Manual 1763-RM001
Information on the MicroLogix 1100 Controllers instruction set.
MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Installation
Instructions 1763-IN001
Information on mounting and wiring the MicroLogix 1100 Controllers, including
a mounting template for easy installation.
Advanced Interface Converter (AIC+) User Manual
1761-UM004
A description on how to install and connect an AIC+. This manual also
contains information on network wiring.
DeviceNet Interface User Manual 1761-UM005
Information on how to install, configure, and commission a DNI.
DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manua
1770-6.5.16
Information on DF1 open protocol.
Modbus Protocol Specifications Available from
www.modbus.org
Information about the Modbus protocol.
Allen-Bradley Programmable Controller Grounding and
Wiring Guidelines 1770-4.1
In-depth information on grounding and wiring Allen-Bradley programmable
controllers.
Application Considerations for Solid-State Controls
SGI-1.1
A description of important differences between solid-state programmable
controller products and hard-wired electromechanical devices.
National Electrical Code - Published by the National Fire
Protection Association of Boston, MA.
An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment.
Allen-Bradley Publication Index SD499
A complete listing of current documentation, including ordering instructions.
Also indicates whether the documents are available on CD-ROM or in
multi-languages.
Allen-Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary AG-7.1
A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations.
Common Techniques Used
in this Manual
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
The following conventions are used throughout this manual:
• Bulleted lists such as this one provide information, not
procedural steps.
• Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical
information.
• Italic type is used for emphasis.
Chapter
1
Hardware Overview
Hardware Features
The Bulletin 1763, MicroLogix 1100 programmable controller contains
a power supply, input and output circuits, a processor, an isolated
combination RS-232/485 communication port, and an Ethernet port.
Each controller supports 18 I/O points (10 digital inputs, 2 analog
inputs, and 6 discrete outputs).
The hardware features of the controller are shown below.
Top View
Side View
12
11
6
5
8
4
7
ESC
OK
3
9
2
1
10
Hardware Features
Feature
Description
Feature
Description
1
Output Terminal Block
7
LCD Keypad
(ESC, OK, Up, Down, Left, Right)
2
Battery Connector
8
Status LED indicators
3
Bus Connector Interface to Expansion I/O
9
Memory Module Port Cover(1) -orMemory Module(2)
4
Battery
10
DIN Rail Latches
5
Input Terminal Block
11
RS-232/485 Communication Port
(Channel 0, isolated)
6
LCD
12
Ethernet Port
(Channel 1)
(1)
Shipped with controller.
(2)
Optional equipment.
11
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
12
Hardware Overview
Controller Input Power and Embedded I/O
Catalog Number
1763-L16AWA
1763-L16BWA
1763-L16BBB
1763-L16DWD
Description
Input Power
120/240V ac
Digital Inputs
(10) 120V ac
Analog Inputs
(2) voltage input
Digital Outputs
(6) relay
120/240V ac
(6) 24V dc
0...10V dc
(2) voltage input
All individually isolated
(6) relay
0...10V dc
All individually isolated
24V dc
(4) high-speed 24V dc(1)
(6) 24V dc
(2) voltage input
0...10V dc
12...24V dc
(4) high-speed 24V dc(1)
(6) 12...24V dc
(2) relay (isolated)
(2) 24V dc FET
(2) high-speed 24V dc FET
(2) voltage input
(6) relay
(4) high-speed 12/24V dc(1) 0...10V dc
(1)
All individually isolated
The 4 high-speed inputs (inputs 0 through 3) can be used individually for pulse catch/latching inputs or combined as a high speed counter. Refer to Digital Input
Specifications on page 161 and the MicroLogix 1100 Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001, for more information.
Component Descriptions
MicroLogix 1100 Memory Module and Built-in Real-Time Clock
The controller has a built-in real-time clock to provide a reference for
applications that need time-based control.
The controller is shipped with a memory module port cover in place.
You can order a memory module, 1763-MM1, as an accessory. The
memory module provides optional backup of your user program and
data, and is a means to transport your programs between controllers.
The program and data in your MicroLogix 1100 is non-volatile and is
stored when the power is lost to the controller. The memory module
provides additional backup that can be stored separately. The memory
module does not increase the available memory of the controller.
1763-MM1 Memory Module
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Hardware Overview
13
1762 Expansion I/O
1762 expansion I/O can be connected to the MicroLogix 1100
controller, as shown below.
TIP
at
A maximum of four I/O modules, in any
combination, can be connected to a controller. See
Appendix G to determine how much heat a certain
combination generates.
1762 Expansion I/O
1762 Expansion I/O
1762 Expansion I/O Connected to MicroLogix 1100 Controller
Expansion I/O
Catalog Number
Description
Digital
1762-IA8
8-Point 120V ac Input Module
1762-IQ8
8-Point Sink/Source 24V dc Input Module
1762-IQ16
16-Point Sink/Source 24V dc Input Module
1762-OA8
8-Point 120/240V ac Triac Output Module
1762-OB8
8-Point Sourcing 24V dc Output Module
1762-OB16
16-Point Sourcing 24V dc Output Module
1762-OW8
8-Point AC/DC Relay Output Module
1762-OW16
16-Point AC/DC Relay Output Module
1762-OX6I
6-Point Isolated AC/DC Relay Output Module
1762-IQ8OW6
8-Point Sink/Source 24V dc Input and 6-Point AC/DC Relay
Output Module
Analog
1762-IF4
4-Channel Voltage/Current Analog Input Module
1762-OF4
4-Channel Voltage/Current Analog Output Module
1762-IF2OF2
Combination 2-Channel Input 2-Channel Output
Voltage/Current Analog Module
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
14
Hardware Overview
Expansion I/O
Catalog Number
Description
Temperature
Communication Cables
1762-IR4
4-Channel RTD/Resistance Input Module
1762-IT4
4-Channel Thermocouple/mV Input Module
Use only the following communication cables with the MicroLogix
1100 controllers. These cables are required for Class I Div. 2
applications.
•
•
•
•
•
•
1761-CBL-AM00 Series C or later
1761-CBL-AP00 Series C or later
1761-CBL-PM02 Series C or later
1761-CBL-HM02 Series C or later
2707-NC9 Series C or later
1763-NC01 Series A or later
ATTENTION
UNSUPPORTED CONNECTION
Do not connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to
another MicroLogix family controller such as
MicroLogix 1000, MicroLogix 1200, MicroLogix 1500,
or the network port of a 1747-DPS1 Port Splitter
using a 1761- CBL-AM00 (8-pin mini-DIN to 8-pin
mini-DIN) cable or equivalent.
This type of connection will cause damage to the
RS-232/485 communication port (Channel 0) of the
MicroLogix 1100 and/or the controller itself. The
communication pins used for RS-485
communications on the MicroLogix 1100 are
alternately used for 24V power on the other
MicroLogix controllers and the network port of the
1747-DPS1 Port Splitter.
Programming
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Programming the MicroLogix 1100 controller is done using RSLogix
500, Revision 7.0 or later. To use all of the latest features, RSLogix 500
programming software must be version 7.20.00 or later.
Communication cables for programming are available separately from
the controller and software.
Hardware Overview
15
Firmware Revision History
Features are added to the controllers through firmware upgrades. Use
the listing below to be sure that your controller’s firmware is at the
level you need. Firmware upgrades are not required, except to allow
you access to the new features.
MicroLogix 1100
Catalog
Number
OS(1)
Series
Letter
Release Date
OS
OS
Revision Firmware
Release No.
Letter
Enhancement
1763-L16AWA
1763-L16BWA
1763-L16BBB
A
A
FRN1
August 2005
Initial product release.
A
B
FRN2
October 2005
According to the SRAM component, MicroLogix 1100 may cause
Hard-fault at the start of the Operating System in the very high
temperature environment. Corrected.
A
C
FRN3
February 2006
Added Data file write feature through web server.
B
A
FRN4
February 2007
• Direct connection to RS485 Network for DF1 half-duplex
Master driver.
1763-L16AWA
1763-L16BWA
1763-L16BBB
• Direct connection to RS485 Network for DF1 half-duplex Slave
driver.
• Direct connection to RS485 Network for ASCII driver.
• Selectable Stop/Data Bits for Modbus Master RTU driver.
• Selectable Stop/Data Bits for Modbus Slave RTU driver.
• Selectable Stop/Data Bits for ASCII driver.
• Settable Inactivity Timeout feature for Ethernet driver.
• Unsolicited Ethernet messaging to RSLinx OPC topic.
• CIP Generic messaging through the Ethernet port.
• Unconnected Ethernet/IP protocol for Ethernet driver.
• IP conflict detection mechanism.
• E-mail feature.
• Ethernet MSG break bit.
• DNS functionality when E-mail feature is used.
• Change IP Address using Ethernet MSG instruction.
• ST file type for all PCCC commands.
• HSC (High Speed Counter) up to 40 KHz.
• PTO/PWM up to 40 KHz.
• 2-channel Analog Input Filter.
• Web View Disable for Data Files.
1763-L16AWA
1763-L16BWA
1763-L16BBB
B
B
FRN5
May 2007
• Improved system interrupt delay time.
1763-L16DWD
B
B
FRN5
May 2007
• Initial Product release. Supports all the features listed above
for the 1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA, and 1763-L16BBB
controllers.
(1)
OS = Operating System.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
16
Hardware Overview
Communication Options
The MicroLogix 1100 controllers provide two communications ports,
an isolated combination RS-232/485 communication port (Channel 0)
and an Ethernet port (Channel 1).
The isolated Channel 0 port on the MicroLogix 1100 can be connected
to the following:
• operator interfaces, personal computers, etc. using DF1 Full
Duplex point-to-point
• a DH-485 network
• a DF1 Radio Modem network
• a DF1 half-duplex network as an RTU Master or RTU Slave
• a Modbus network as an RTU Master or RTU Slave
• an ASCII network
• a DeviceNet network as a slave or peer using a DeviceNet
Interface (catalog number 1761-NET-DNI)
• an Ethernet network using the Ethernet Interface module
(catalog number 1761-NET-ENI, or 1761-NET-ENIW)
When connecting to a DH-485 network, DF1 half-duplex network(1)
or a Modbus network, the MicroLogix 1100 can be connected directly
via Channel 0 (without an Advanced Interface Converter, catalog
number 1761-NET-AIC). The Channel 0 combo port provides both
RS-232 and RS-485 isolated connections. The appropriate electrical
interface is selected through your choice of communication cable. The
existing MicroLogix 1761 communication cables provide an interface
to the RS-232 drivers. The 1763-NC01 cable provides an interface to
the RS-485 drivers (for DH-485, Modbus RTU Master, RTU slave
networks, DF1 half-duplex Master(1) and DF1 half-duplex Slave(1)).
The controller may also be connected to serial devices, such as bar
code readers, weigh scales, serial printers, and other intelligent
devices, using ASCII. See Default Communication Configuration on
page 72 for the configuration settings for Channel 0. MicroLogix 1100
can be connected directly to RS-485 network via channel 0, using
ASCII(1).)
The MicroLogix 1100 supports Ethernet communication via the
Ethernet communication Channel 1. You can connect your controller
to a local area network that provides communication between various
devices at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps. This port supports CIP explicit
messaging (message exchange) only. The controller cannot be used
(1)
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
OS Series B FRN4 or later.
Hardware Overview
17
for CIP implicit messaging (real-time I/O messaging). The controller
also includes an embedded web server which allows viewing of not
only module information, TCP/IP configuration, and diagnostic
information, but also includes the data table memory map and data
table monitor screen using a standard web browser.
See Chapter 4 for more information on connecting to the available
communication options.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
18
Hardware Overview
Notes:
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Chapter
2
Installing Your Controller
This chapter shows you how to install your controller. The only tools
you require are a flat or Phillips head screwdriver and drill. Topics
include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Agency Certifications
Compliance to European
Union Directives
19
agency certifications
compliance to European Union Directives
installation considerations
safety considerations
power considerations
preventing excessive heat
master control relay
installing a memory module
using the battery
controller mounting dimensions
controller and expansion I/O spacing
mounting the controller
mounting 1762 expansion I/O
connecting 1762 expansion I/O
• UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for use in Class I,
Division 2, Hazardous Locations, Groups A, B, C, D
• C-UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for use in Canada
• CE marked for all applicable directives
• C-Tick marked for all applicable acts
This product has the CE mark and is approved for installation within
the European Union and EEA regions. It has been designed and tested
to meet the following directives.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
20
Installing Your Controller
EMC Directive
This product is tested to meet Council Directive 89/336/EEC
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and the following standards, in
whole or in part, documented in a technical construction file:
• EN 61000-6-4
EMC - Part 6-4: Generic Standards - Emission Standard for
Industrial Environments
• EN 61000-6-2
EMC - Part 6-2: Generic Standards - Immunity for Industrial
Environments
This product is intended for use in an industrial environment.
Low Voltage Directive
This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73/23/EEC Low
Voltage, by applying the safety requirements of EN 61131-2
Programmable Controllers, Part 2 - Equipment Requirements and
Tests.
For specific information required by EN 61131-2, see the appropriate
sections in this publication, as well as the following Allen-Bradley
publications:
• Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for
Noise Immunity, publication 1770-4.1
• Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries, publication AG-5.4
• Automation Systems Catalog, publication B115
Installation Considerations
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Most applications require installation in an industrial enclosure
(Pollution Degree 2(1)) to reduce the effects of electrical interference
(Over Voltage Category II(2)) and environmental exposure. Locate
your controller as far as possible from power lines, load lines, and
other sources of electrical noise such as hard-contact switches, relays,
and AC motor drives. For more information on proper grounding
guidelines, see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding
Guidelines publication 1770-4.1.
(1)
Pollution Degree 2 is an environment where normally only non-conductive pollution occurs except that
occasionally temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected.
(2)
Overvoltage Category II is the load level section of the electrical distribution system. At this level, transient
voltages are controlled and do not exceed the impulse voltage capability of the products insulation.
Installing Your Controller
ATTENTION
ATTENTION
ATTENTION
Safety Considerations
21
Electrostatic discharge can damage semiconductor
devices inside the controller. Do not touch the
connector pins or other sensitive areas.
Vertical mounting of the controller is not supported
due to heat build-up considerations.
Be careful of metal chips when drilling mounting
holes for your controller or other equipment within
the enclosure or panel. Drilled fragments that fall
into the controller or I/O modules could cause
damage. Do not drill holes above a mounted
controller if the protective debris shields are
removed or the processor is installed.
Safety considerations are an important element of proper system
installation. Actively thinking about the safety of yourself and others,
as well as the condition of your equipment, is of primary importance.
We recommend reviewing the following safety considerations.
Hazardous Location Considerations
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B,
C, D or non-hazardous locations only. The following WARNING
statement applies to use in hazardous locations.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
22
Installing Your Controller
WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
• Substitution of components may impair suitability
for Class I, Division 2.
• Do not replace components or disconnect
equipment unless power has been switched off.
• Do not connect or disconnect components unless
power has been switched off.
• This product must be installed in an enclosure.
All cables connected to the product must remain
in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or
other means.
• All wiring must comply with N.E.C. article
501-10(b).
Use only the following communication cables in Class I, Division 2
hazardous locations.
Communication Cables for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations
1761-CBL-AM00 Series C or later
1761-CBL-AP00 Series C or later
1761-CBL-PM02 Series C or later
1761-CBL-HM02 Series C or later
2707-NC9 Series C or later
1763-NC01 Series A or later
Disconnecting Main Power
WARNING
Explosion Hazard
Do not replace components, connect equipment, or
disconnect equipment unless power has been
switched off.
The main power disconnect switch should be located where operators
and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it. In
addition to disconnecting electrical power, all other sources of power
(pneumatic and hydraulic) should be de-energized before working on
a machine or process controlled by a controller.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Installing Your Controller
23
Safety Circuits
WARNING
Explosion Hazard
Do not connect or disconnect connectors while
circuit is live.
Circuits installed on the machine for safety reasons, like overtravel
limit switches, stop push buttons, and interlocks, should always be
hard-wired directly to the master control relay. These devices must be
wired in series so that when any one device opens, the master control
relay is de-energized, thereby removing power to the machine. Never
alter these circuits to defeat their function. Serious injury or machine
damage could result.
Power Distribution
There are some points about power distribution that you should
know:
• The master control relay must be able to inhibit all machine
motion by removing power to the machine I/O devices when
the relay is de-energized. It is recommended that the controller
remain powered even when the master control relay is
de-energized.
• If you are using a dc power supply, interrupt the load side rather
than the ac line power. This avoids the additional delay of
power supply turn-off. The dc power supply should be powered
directly from the fused secondary of the transformer. Power to
the dc input and output circuits should be connected through a
set of master control relay contacts.
Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit
Any part can fail, including the switches in a master control relay
circuit. The failure of one of these switches would most likely cause
an open circuit, which would be a safe power-off failure. However, if
one of these switches shorts out, it no longer provides any safety
protection. These switches should be tested periodically to assure they
will stop machine motion when needed.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
24
Installing Your Controller
Power Considerations
The following explains power considerations for the micro controllers.
Isolation Transformers
You may want to use an isolation transformer in the ac line to the
controller. This type of transformer provides isolation from your
power distribution system to reduce the electrical noise that enters the
controller and is often used as a step-down transformer to reduce line
voltage. Any transformer used with the controller must have a
sufficient power rating for its load. The power rating is expressed in
volt-amperes (VA).
Power Supply Inrush
During power-up, the MicroLogix 1100 power supply allows a brief
inrush current to charge internal capacitors. Many power lines and
control transformers can supply inrush current for a brief time. If the
power source cannot supply this inrush current, the source voltage
may sag momentarily.
The only effect of limited inrush current and voltage sag on the
MicroLogix 1100 is that the power supply capacitors charge more
slowly. However, the effect of a voltage sag on other equipment
should be considered. For example, a deep voltage sag may reset a
computer connected to the same power source. The following
considerations determine whether the power source must be required
to supply high inrush current:
• The power-up sequence of devices in a system.
• The amount of the power source voltage sag if the inrush
current cannot be supplied.
• The effect of voltage sag on other equipment in the system.
If the entire system is powered-up at the same time, a brief sag in the
power source voltage typically will not affect any equipment.
Loss of Power Source
The power supply is designed to withstand brief power losses without
affecting the operation of the system. The time the system is
operational during power loss is called program scan hold-up time
after loss of power. The duration of the power supply hold-up time
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Installing Your Controller
25
depends on the type and state of the I/O, but is typically between 10
milliseconds and 3 seconds. When the duration of power loss reaches
this limit, the power supply signals the processor that it can no longer
provide adequate dc power to the system. This is referred to as a
power supply shutdown. The processor then performs an orderly
shutdown of the controller.
Input States on Power Down
The power supply hold-up time as described above is generally
longer than the turn-on and turn-off times of the inputs. Because of
this, the input state change from “On” to “Off” that occurs when
power is removed may be recorded by the processor before the
power supply shuts down the system. Understanding this concept is
important. The user program should be written to take this effect into
account.
Other Types of Line Conditions
Occasionally the power source to the system can be temporarily
interrupted. It is also possible that the voltage level may drop
substantially below the normal line voltage range for a period of time.
Both of these conditions are considered to be a loss of power for the
system.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
26
Installing Your Controller
Preventing Excessive Heat
For most applications, normal convective cooling keeps the controller
within the specified operating range. Ensure that the specified
temperature range is maintained. Proper spacing of components
within an enclosure is usually sufficient for heat dissipation.
In some applications, a substantial amount of heat is produced by
other equipment inside or outside the enclosure. In this case, place
blower fans inside the enclosure to assist in air circulation and to
reduce “hot spots” near the controller.
Additional cooling provisions might be necessary when high ambient
temperatures are encountered.
TIP
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Do not bring in unfiltered outside air. Place the
controller in an enclosure to protect it from a
corrosive atmosphere. Harmful contaminants or dirt
could cause improper operation or damage to
components. In extreme cases, you may need to use
air conditioning to protect against heat build-up
within the enclosure.
Installing Your Controller
Master Control Relay
27
A hard-wired master control relay (MCR) provides a reliable means for
emergency machine shutdown. Since the master control relay allows
the placement of several emergency-stop switches in different
locations, its installation is important from a safety standpoint.
Overtravel limit switches or mushroom-head push buttons are wired
in series so that when any of them opens, the master control relay is
de-energized. This removes power to input and output device circuits.
Refer to the figures on pages 29 and 30.
ATTENTION
TIP
Never alter these circuits to defeat their function
since serious injury and/or machine damage could
result.
If you are using an external dc power supply,
interrupt the dc output side rather than the ac line
side of the supply to avoid the additional delay of
power supply turn-off.
The ac line of the dc output power supply should be
fused.
Connect a set of master control relays in series with
the dc power supplying the input and output
circuits.
Place the main power disconnect switch where operators and
maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it. If you mount
a disconnect switch inside the controller enclosure, place the switch
operating handle on the outside of the enclosure, so that you can
disconnect power without opening the enclosure.
Whenever any of the emergency-stop switches are opened, power to
input and output devices should be removed.
When you use the master control relay to remove power from the
external I/O circuits, power continues to be provided to the
controller’s power supply so that diagnostic indicators on the
processor can still be observed.
The master control relay is not a substitute for a disconnect to the
controller. It is intended for any situation where the operator must
quickly de-energize I/O devices only. When inspecting or installing
terminal connections, replacing output fuses, or working on
equipment within the enclosure, use the disconnect to shut off power
to the rest of the system.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
28
Installing Your Controller
TIP
Do not control the master control relay with the
controller. Provide the operator with the safety of a
direct connection between an emergency-stop
switch and the master control relay.
Using Emergency-Stop Switches
When using emergency-stop switches, adhere to the following points:
• Do not program emergency-stop switches in the controller
program. Any emergency-stop switch should turn off all
machine power by turning off the master control relay.
• Observe all applicable local codes concerning the placement
and labeling of emergency-stop switches.
• Install emergency-stop switches and the master control relay in
your system. Make certain that relay contacts have a sufficient
rating for your application. Emergency-stop switches must be
easy to reach.
• In the following illustration, input and output circuits are shown
with MCR protection. However, in most applications, only
output circuits require MCR protection.
The following illustrations show the Master Control Relay wired in a
grounded system.
TIP
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
In most applications input circuits do not require
MCR protection; however, if you need to remove
power from all field devices, you must include MCR
contacts in series with input power wiring.
Installing Your Controller
29
Schematic (Using IEC Symbols)
L1
L2
230V ac
Disconnect
MCR
Fuse
230V ac
I/O
Circuits
Isolation
Transformer
X1 115V ac
or 230V ac
X2
Operation of either of these contacts will
remove power from the external I/O
circuits, stopping machine motion.
Emergency-Stop
Push Button
Overtravel
Limit Switch
Fuse
Stop
Start
Master Control Relay (MCR)
Cat. No. 700-PK400A1
Suppressor
Cat. No. 700-N24
MCR
Suppr.
MCR
MCR
115V ac or
230V ac
I/O Circuits
dc Power Supply.
Use IEC 950/EN 60950
_
+
(Lo)
MCR
(Hi)
Line Terminals: Connect to terminals of Power
Supply (1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA).
24V dc
I/O
Circuits
Line Terminals: Connect to 24V dc terminals of
Power Supply (1763-L16BBB).
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
30
Installing Your Controller
Schematic (Using ANSI/CSA Symbols)
L1
230V ac
L2
Disconnect
MCR
Fuse
Isolation
Transformer
X1
115V ac or
X2
230V ac
Fuse
Operation of either of these contacts will
remove power from the external I/O
circuits, stopping machine motion.
Emergency-Stop
Push Button
Overtravel
Limit Switch
230V ac
Output
Circuits
Master Control Relay (MCR)
Cat. No. 700-PK400A1
Suppressor
Cat. No. 700-N24
Start
Stop
MCR
Suppr.
MCR
MCR
dc Power Supply. Use
NEC Class 2 for UL
Listing.
_
(Lo)
(Hi)
Line Terminals: Connect to terminals of Power
Supply (1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA).
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
+
115V ac or
230V ac
I/O Circuits
MCR
24 V dc
I/O
Circuits
Line Terminals: Connect to 24V dc terminals of
Power Supply (1763-L16BBB).
Installing Your Controller
Installing a Memory
Module
31
1. Remove the memory module port cover.
2. Align the connector on the memory module with the connector
pins on the controller.
ORY
MEMDULE
MO
3. Firmly seat the memory module into the controller.
ORY
MEMDULE
MO
ORY
MEMDULE
MO
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
32
Installing Your Controller
Using the Battery
The MicroLogix 1100 controller is equipped with a replaceable
battery. The Battery Low indicator on the LCD display of the controller
shows the status of the replaceable battery. When the battery is low,
the indicator is set (displayed as a solid rectangle). This means that
either the battery wire connector is disconnected, or the battery may
fail within 2 weeks if it is connected. When the battery level is
acceptable, the indicator is clear (displayed as an empty rectangle).
IMPORTANT
The MicroLogix 1100 controller ships with the battery
wire connector connected.
Ensure that the battery wire connector is inserted
into the connector port if your application needs
battery power. For example, when using a real-time
clock (RTC), or to store the program in the
controller's memory for an extended period of time
while the power is removed.
See Lithium Battery (1763-BA) in the appendix B, for
more information on installation, handling, usage,
storage, and disposal of the battery.
SeeRTC Battery Operation on page 144, for more
information on the use of the battery in relation with
RTC.
IMPORTANT
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
When the controller’s Battery Low indicator is set
(displayed as a solid rectangle) with the battery wire
connector connected, we recommend strongly to
install a new battery immediately.
Installing Your Controller
33
Connecting the Battery Wire Connector
Follow the procedure below to connect the battery wire connector to
the battery connector.
1. Insert the replaceable battery wire connector into the battery
connector.
2. Secure the battery connector wires along the wire guide as
shown below.
Replaceable Battery Pocket
Replaceable Battery
Wire Guide
Battery Connector Wires
ESC
OK
Battery Wire Connector
Battery Connector
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
34
Installing Your Controller
Controller Mounting
Dimensions
C
A
B
1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA, 1763-L16BBB
Controller Dimensions
Dimension
Controller and Expansion
I/O Spacing
1763-L16AWA
1763-L16BWA
1763-L16BBB
A
90 mm (3.5 in.)
B
110 mm (4.33 in.)
C
87 mm (3.43 in.)
The controller mounts horizontally, with the expansion I/O extending
to the right of the controller. Allow 50 mm (2 in.) of space on all sides
of the controller system for adequate ventilation. Maintain spacing
from enclosure walls, wireways, adjacent equipment, etc., as shown
below.
Bottom
1762 I/O
MicroLogix
1100
1762 I/O
Side
1762 I/O
Top
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
1763-L16DWD
Side
Installing Your Controller
Mounting the Controller
35
MicroLogix™ 1100 controllers are suitable for use in an industrial
environment when installed in accordance with these instructions.
Specifically, this equipment is intended for use in clean, dry
environments (Pollution degree 2(1)) and to circuits not exceeding
Over Voltage Category II(2) (IEC 60664-1).(3)
ATTENTION
Do not remove the protective debris shield until after
the controller and all other equipment in the panel
near the controller are mounted and wiring is
complete. Once wiring is complete, remove
protective debris shield. Failure to remove shield
before operating can cause overheating.
debris shield
ATTENTION
TIP
Electrostatic discharge can damage semiconductor
devices inside the controller. Do not touch the
connector pins or other sensitive areas.
For environments with greater vibration and shock
concerns, use the panel mounting method described
on page 37, rather than DIN rail mounting.
(1)
Pollution Degree 2 is an environment where, normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs except that
occasionally a temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected.
(2)
Over Voltage Category II is the load level section of the electrical distribution system. At this level transient
voltages are controlled and do not exceed the impulse voltage capability of the product’s insulation.
(3)
Pollution Degree 2 and Over Voltage Category II are International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
designations.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
36
Installing Your Controller
DIN Rail Mounting
The maximum extension of the latch is 14 mm (0.55 in.) in the open
position. A flat-blade screwdriver is required for removal of the
controller. The controller can be mounted to EN50022-35x7.5 or
EN50022-35x15 DIN rails. DIN rail mounting dimensions are shown
below.
27.5 mm
(1.08 in.)
90 mm
(3.5 in.)
27.5 mm
(1.08 in.)
Follow this procedure to install your controller on the DIN rail.
1. Mount your DIN rail. (Make sure that the placement of the
controller on the DIN rail meets the recommended spacing
requirements, see Controller and Expansion I/O Spacing on
page 34. Refer to the mounting template inside the back cover
of this document.)
2. Close the DIN latch, if it is open.
3. Hook the top slot over the DIN rail.
4. While pressing the controller down against the top of the rail,
snap the bottom of the controller into position.
5. Leave the protective debris shield attached until you are finished
wiring the controller and any other devices.
To remove your controller from the DIN rail:
1. Place a flat-blade screwdriver in the DIN rail latch at the bottom
of the controller.
2. Holding the controller, pry downward on the latch until the
latch locks in the open position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the second DIN rail latch.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Installing Your Controller
37
4. Unhook the top of the DIN rail slot from the rail.
ESC
open
OK
closed
Panel Mounting
Mount to panel using #8 or M4 screws. To install your controller using
mounting screws:
1. Remove the mounting template from inside the back cover of
the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Installation
Instructions, publication 1763-IN001.
2. Secure the template to the mounting surface. (Make sure your
controller is spaced properly. See Controller and Expansion I/O
Spacing on page 34.)
3. Drill holes through the template.
4. Remove the mounting template.
5. Mount the controller.
6. Leave the protective debris shield in place until you are finished
wiring the controller and any other devices.
Debris Shield
Mounting Template
(Remove before
installing controller)
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
38
Installing Your Controller
1762 Expansion I/O
Dimensions
A
C
B
Dimension
Mounting 1762 Expansion
I/O
Expansion I/O Module
A
90 mm (3.5 in.)
B
40 mm (1.57 in.)
C
87 mm (3.43 in.)
ATTENTION
During panel or DIN rail mounting of all devices, be
sure that all debris (metal chips, wire stands, etc.) is
kept from falling into the module. Debris that falls
into the module could cause damage when the
module is under power.
DIN Rail Mounting
The module can be mounted using the following DIN rails:
• 35 x 7.5 mm (EN 50 022 - 35 x 7.5), or
• 35 x 15 mm (EN 50 022 - 35 x 15).
Before mounting the module on a DIN rail, close the DIN rail latch.
Press the DIN rail mounting area of the module against the DIN rail.
The latch momentarily opens and locks into place.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Installing Your Controller
39
Use DIN rail end anchors (Allen-Bradley part number 1492-EA35 or
1492-EAH35) for vibration or shock environments. The following
illustration shows the location of the end anchors.
End Anchor
End Anchor
TIP
1762 expansion I/O must be mounted horizontally as
illustrated.
TIP
For environments with greater vibration and shock
concerns, use the panel mounting method described
below, instead of DIN rail mounting.
Panel Mounting
Use the dimensional template shown below to mount the module.
The preferred mounting method is to use two M4 or #8 panhead
screws per module. Mounting screws are required on every module.
For more than 2 modules: (number of modules - 1) x 40 mm (1.59 in.)
A = 95 mm (3.740 in.)
1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA, 1763-L16BBB
A
40.4
(1.59)
1762 I/O
MicroLogix
1100
1762 I/O
100 90
(3.94) (3.54)
40.4
(1.59)
1762 I/O
14.5
(0.57)
NOTE: All dimensions are in mm (inches).
Hole spacing tolerance: ±0.4 mm (0.016 in.).
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
40
Installing Your Controller
Connecting Expansion I/O
The expansion I/O module is attached to the controller or another I/O
module by means of a flat ribbon cable after mounting, as shown
below.
TIP
Use the pull loop on the connector to disconnect
modules. Do not pull on the ribbon cable.
TIP
Up to four expansion I/O modules can be connected
to a controller.
ATTENTION
Remove power before removing or inserting an I/O
module. When you remove or insert a module with
power applied, an electrical arc may occur. An
electrical arc can cause personal injury or property
damage by:
• sending an erroneous signal to your system’s field
devices, causing the controller to fault
• causing an explosion in a hazardous environment
Electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on
both the module and its mating connector. Worn
contacts may create electrical resistance, reducing
product reliability.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Installing Your Controller
WARNING
41
EXPLOSION HAZARD
In Class I, Division 2 applications, the bus connector
must be fully seated and the bus connector cover
must be snapped in place.
In Class I, Division 2 applications, all modules must
be mounted in direct contact with each other as
shown on page 40. If DIN rail mounting is used, an
end stop must be installed ahead of the controller
and after the last 1762 I/O module.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
42
Installing Your Controller
Notes:
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Chapter
3
Wiring Your Controller
This chapter describes how to wire your controller and expansion
I/O. Topics include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wiring Requirements
wire requirements
using surge suppressors
grounding the controller
wiring diagrams
sinking and sourcing wiring diagrams
controller I/O wiring
wiring your analog channels
expansion I/O wiring
Wiring Recommendation
ATTENTION
ATTENTION
Before you install and wire any device, disconnect
power to the controller system.
Calculate the maximum possible current in each
power and common wire. Observe all electrical
codes dictating the maximum current allowable for
each wire size. Current above the maximum ratings
may cause wiring to overheat, which can cause
damage.
United States Only: If the controller is installed within
a potentially hazardous environment, all wiring must
comply with the requirements stated in the National
Electrical Code 501-10 (b).
• Allow for at least 50 mm. (2 in.) between I/O wiring ducts or
terminal strips and the controller.
• Route incoming power to the controller by a path separate from
the device wiring. Where paths must cross, their intersection
should be perpendicular.
43
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
44
Wiring Your Controller
Do not run signal or communications wiring and
power wiring in the same conduit. Wires with
different signal characteristics should be routed by
separate paths.
TIP
• Separate wiring by signal type. Bundle wiring with similar
electrical characteristics together.
• Separate input wiring from output wiring.
• Label wiring to all devices in the system. Use tape,
shrink-tubing, or other dependable means for labeling purposes.
In addition to labeling, use colored insulation to identify wiring
based on signal characteristics. For example, you may use blue
for dc wiring and red for ac wiring.
Wire Requirements
Wire Type
Wire Size (2 wire maximum per terminal screw)
1 wire per terminal
2 wire per terminal
Solid
Cu-90°C (194°F)
#12 to #20 AWG
#16 to #20 AWG
Stranded
Cu-90°C (194°F)
#14 to #20 AWG
#18 to #20 AWG
Wiring torque = 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb) rated
Wiring the Terminal Block
The MicroLogix 1100 controllers have screw-cage clamps on the input
and output terminal blocks. With screw-cage clamp terminal blocks,
there is no need to attach additional hardware such as a spade lug to
the wire, or use a finger-safe cover.
To wire the terminal block:
1. Strip the end of the wire.
The recommended length for the stripped end of the wire is 11.0
mm (0.440 in.).
2. Insert it into an open clamp.
3. Using a small, flat-blade screwdriver, tighten the terminal screw.
To ensure that the wire conductor is secured inside the clamp,
tighten it to the rated torque, 0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb).
The diameter of the terminal screw head is 5.5 mm (0.220 in.).
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Wiring Your Controller
45
Screw-cage clamp terminal block
Using Surge Suppressors
Because of the potentially high current surges that occur when
switching inductive load devices, such as motor starters and solenoids,
the use of some type of surge suppression to protect and extend the
operating life of the controllers output contacts is required. Switching
inductive loads without surge suppression can significantly reduce the
life expectancy of relay contacts. By adding a suppression device
directly across the coil of an inductive device, you prolong the life of
the output or relay contacts. You also reduce the effects of voltage
transients and electrical noise from radiating into adjacent systems.
The following diagram shows an output with a suppression device.
We recommend that you locate the suppression device as close as
possible to the load device.
+dc or L1
VAC/DC
Suppression
Device
Out 0
Out 1
ac or dc
Outputs
Out 2
Out 3
Load
Out 4
Out 5
Out 6
Out 7
COM
dc COM or L2
If the outputs are dc, we recommend that you use an 1N4004 diode
for surge suppression, as shown below. For inductive dc load devices,
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
46
Wiring Your Controller
a diode is suitable. A 1N4004 diode is acceptable for most
applications. A surge suppressor can also be used. See for
recommended suppressors. As shown below, these surge suppression
circuits connect directly across the load device.
+24V dc
VAC/DC
Out 0
Out 1
Out 2
Out 3
Relay or Solid
State dc Outputs Out 4
Out 5
Out 6
Out 7 24V dc common
COM
IN4004 Diode
(A surge suppressor
can also be used.)
Suitable surge suppression methods for inductive ac load devices
include a varistor, an RC network, or an Allen-Bradley surge
suppressor, all shown below. These components must be
appropriately rated to suppress the switching transient characteristic of
the particular inductive device. See the table on 47 for recommended
suppressors.
Surge Suppression for Inductive ac Load Devices
Output Device
Output Device
Output Device
Surge
Suppressor
Varistor
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
RC Network
Wiring Your Controller
47
Recommended Surge Suppressors
Use the Allen-Bradley surge suppressors shown in the following table
for use with relays, contactors, and starters.
Recommended Surge Suppressors
Device
Coil Voltage
Suppressor Catalog
Number
Bulletin 509 Motor Starter
Bulletin 509 Motor Starter
120V ac
240V ac
599-K04(1)
599-KA04(1)
Bulletin 100 Contactor
Bulletin 100 Contactor
120V ac
240V ac
199-FSMA1(2)
199-FSMA2(2)
Bulletin 709 Motor Starter
120V ac
1401-N10(2)
Bulletin 700 Type R, RM Relays
ac coil
None Required
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
12V dc
12V dc
199-FSMA9
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
24V dc
24V dc
199-FSMA9
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
48V dc
48V dc
199-FSMA9
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
115-125V dc
115-125V dc
199-FSMA10
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
230-250V dc
230-250V dc
199-FSMA11
Bulletin 700 Type N, P, or PK Relay
150V max, ac or DC
700-N24(2)
Miscellaneous electromagnetic
devices limited to 35 sealed VA
150V max, ac or DC
700-N24(2)
(1)
Varistor – Not recommended for use on relay outputs.
(2)
RC Type – Do not use with Triac outputs.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
48
Wiring Your Controller
Grounding the Controller
ATTENTION
In solid-state control systems, grounding and wire routing helps limit
the effects of noise due to electromagnetic interference (EMI). Run the
ground connection from the ground screw of the controller to the
ground bus prior to connecting any devices. Use AWG #14 wire. For
AC-powered controllers, this connection must be made for safety
purposes.
All devices connected to the RS-232/485 communication port must be referenced to
controller ground, or be floating (not referenced to a potential other than ground).
Failure to follow this procedure may result in property damage or personal injury.
• For 1763-L16BWA controllers, the COM of the sensor supply is also connected to
chassis ground internally. The 24V dc sensor power source should not be used to
power output circuits. It should only be used to power input devices.
• For 1763-L16BBB and 1763-L16DWD controllers, the VDC NEUT or common terminal
of the power supply is also connected to chassis ground internally.
This product is intended to be mounted to a well grounded mounting
surface such as a metal panel. Refer to the Industrial Automation
Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1, for
additional information. Additional grounding connections from the
mounting tab or DIN rail, if used, are not required unless the
mounting surface cannot be grounded.
TIP
Use all four mounting positions for panel mounting
installation.
ESC
OK
Grounding Stamping
ATTENTION
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Remove the protective debris strip before applying
power to the controller. Failure to remove the strip
may cause the controller to overheat.
Wiring Your Controller
Wiring Diagrams
49
The following illustrations show the wiring diagrams for the
MicroLogix 1100 controllers. Controllers with dc inputs can be wired
as either sinking or sourcing inputs. (Sinking and sourcing does not
apply to ac inputs.) Refer to Sinking and Sourcing Wiring Diagrams on
page 3-52.
The controller terminal block layouts are shown below. The shading
on the labels indicates how the terminals are grouped. A detail of the
groupings is shown in the table following the terminal block layouts.
TIP
This
symbol denotes a protective earth ground
terminal which provides a low impedance path
between electrical circuits and earth for safety
purposes and provides noise immunity
improvement. This connection must be made for
safety purposes on ac-powered controllers.
This
symbol denotes a functional earth ground
terminal which provides a low impedance path
between electrical circuits and earth for non-safety
purposes, such as noise immunity improvement.
Terminal Block Layouts
1763-L16AWA
Group 0
NOT
USED
NOT
USED
AC
COM
Group 1
I/0
I/1
I/2
I/3
NOT
USED
VAC
VDC
O/0
VAC
VDC
AC
COM
Group 2
I/4
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
VAC
VDC
O/2
VAC
VDC
O/3
VAC
VDC
O/4
IA
COM
IV1(+)
IV2(+)
O/5
NOT
USED
up
5
VAC
VDC
G ro
up
4
G ro
up
3
G ro
up
2
O/1
G ro
up
1
G ro
L1
L2/N
100-240 VAC
G ro
Output Terminal Block
up
0
Input Terminal Block
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
50
Wiring Your Controller
1763-L16BWA
Group 0
+
DC OUT
24V -
DC
COM
Group 1
I/0
I/1
I/2
I/3
NOT
USED
VAC
VDC
O/0
VAC
VDC
DC
COM
Group 2
I/4
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
VAC
VDC
O/2
VAC
VDC
O/3
VAC
VDC
O/4
IA
COM
IV1(+)
IV2(+)
O/5
NOT
USED
Input Terminal Block
5
VAC
VDC
up
G ro
G ro
G ro
up
up
4
3
2
up
G ro
G ro
up
up
1
O/1
G ro
L1
L2/N
100-240 VAC
0
Output Terminal Block
The 24V dc sensor supply of the 1763-L16BWA
should not be used to power output circuits. It
should only be used to power input devices (e.g.
sensors, switches). See Master Control Relay on page
2-27 for information on MCR wiring in output
circuits.
ATTENTION
1763-L16BBB
Group 0
NOT
USED
NOT
USED
DC
COM
Group 1
I/0
I/1
I/2
I/3
NOT
USED
VAC
VDC
O/0
VAC
VDC
DC
COM
Group 2
I/4
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
IA
COM
NOT
USED
NOT
USED
DC
24V+
O/2
O/3
O/4
O/5
IV1(+)
IV2(+)
DC
24V-
NOT
USED
Input Terminal Block
G ro
G ro
up
1
O/1
up
2
24V DC IN
G ro
+
up
0
Output Terminal Block
1763-L16DWD
Group 0
NOT
USED
NOT
USED
DC
COM
Group 1
I/0
I/1
I/2
I/3
NOT
USED
VAC
VDC
O/0
VAC
VDC
DC
COM
Group 2
I/4
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
VAC
VDC
O/2
VAC
VDC
O/3
VAC
VDC
O/4
IA
COM
IV1(+)
IV2(+)
5
VAC
VDC
G ro
up
4
G ro
up
3
G ro
up
2
O/1
G ro
up
G ro
up
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
G ro
up
+ 12/24V DC IN
0
Output Terminal Block
1
Input Terminal Block
O/5
NOT
USED
Wiring Your Controller
51
Terminal Groupings
Input Terminal Grouping
Controller
1763-L16AWA
1763-L16BWA
1763-L16BBB
1763-L16DWD
Input Group
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Inputs
Common Terminal
AC COM 0
AC COM 1
IA COM
DC COM 0
DC COM 1
IA COM
DC COM 0
DC COM 1
IA COM
Input Terminal
I/0 through I/3
I/4 through I/9
IV1(+) and IV2(+)
I/0 through I/3
I/4 through I/9
IV1(+) and IV2(+)
I/0 through I/3
I/4 through I/9
IV1(+) and IV2(+)
Outputs
Voltage Terminal
VAC/VDC 0
VAC/VDC 1
VAC/VDC 2
VAC/VDC 3
VAC/VDC 4
VAC/VDC 0
VAC/VDC 0
VAC/VDC 1
VAC/VDC 2
VAC/VDC 3
VAC/VDC 4
VAC/VDC 0
VAC/VDC 0
VAC/VDC 1
DC +24V, DC -24V
Output Terminal
O/0
O/1
O/2
O/3
O/4
O/5
O/0
O/1
O/2
O/3
O/4
O/5
O/0
O/1
O/2 through O/5
Output Terminal Grouping
Controller
1763-L16AWA
1763-L16BWA
1763-L16DWD
1763-L16BBB
Output Group
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Group 5
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
52
Wiring Your Controller
Sinking and Sourcing
Wiring Diagrams
Any of the MicroLogix 1100 DC embedded input groups can be
configured as sinking or sourcing depending on how the DC COM is
wired on the group. Refer to pages 53 through 53 for sinking and
sourcing wiring diagrams.
Type
Definition
Sinking Input
The input energizes when high-level voltage is applied to the input
terminal (active high). Connect the power supply VDC (-) to the input
group’s COM terminal.
Sourcing Input
The input energizes when low-level voltage is applied to the input
terminal (active low). Connect the power supply VDC (+) to the input
group’s COM terminal.
The 24V dc sensor power source must not be used to
power output circuits. It should only be used to
power input devices (e.g. sensors, switches). See
Master Control Relay on page 2-27 for information
on MCR wiring in output circuits.
ATTENTION
1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BWA, 1763-L16BBB and 1763-L16DWD
Wiring Diagrams
In the following diagrams, lower case alphabetic
subscripts are appended to common-terminal
connections to indicate that different power sources
may be used for different isolated groups, if desired.
TIP
1763-L16AWA Input Wiring Diagram (1)
L1a
L1b
L2a
NOT
USED
NOT
USED
AC
COM
L2b
I/0
I/1
(1)
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
L1c
I/2
I/3
AC
COM
L2c
I/4
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
“NOT USED” terminals are not intended for use as connection points.
I/9
IA
COM
IV1(+)
IV2(+)
Wiring Your Controller
53
1763-L16BWA Sinking Input Wiring Diagram
24V dc Sensor Power
+DC
-DC
DC OUT
+ 24V -
+DCa
+DCb
-DCa
-DCb
DC
COM
I/0
I/1
I/2
I/3
DC
COM
L1c
L2c
I/4
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
IA
COM
IV1(+)
IV2(+)
IV1(+)
IV2(+)
IV1(+)
IV2(+)
IV1(+)
IV2(+)
1763-L16BWA Sourcing Input Wiring Diagram
24V dc Sensor Power
+DC
-DC
DC OUT
+ 24V -
-DCa
-DCb
+DCa
+DCb
DC
COM
I/0
I/1
I/2
I/3
DC
COM
L1c
L2c
I/4
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
IA
COM
1763-L16BBB and 1763-L16DWD Sinking Input Wiring Diagram
NOT
USED
NOT
USED
+DCa
+DCb
-DCa
-DCb
DC
COM
I/0
I/1
I/2
I/3
DC
COM
L1c
L2c
I/4
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
IA
COM
1763-L16BBB and 1763-L16DWD Sourcing Input Wiring Diagram
NOT
USED
NOT
USED
-DCa
-DCb
+DCa
+DCb
DC
COM
I/0
I/1
I/2
I/3
DC
COM
L1c
L2c
I/4
I/5
I/6
I/7
I/8
I/9
IA
COM
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
54
Wiring Your Controller
1763-L16AWA and 1763-L16BWA Output Wiring Diagram
+DCa
-DCa
L1a
L2a
L1b
L2b
L1c
L2c
L1d
L2d
L1e
L2e
VAC
VDC
O/5
L2
CR
L1
L1
L2/N
100-240 VAC
NOT
USED
VAC
VDC
O/0
VAC
VDC
O/1
VAC
VDC
O/2
CR
VAC
VDC
O/3
VAC
VDC
O/4
NOT
USED
1763-L16BBB Output Wiring Diagram
+DCa
-DCa
+DCb
-DCb
-DCc
+DCc
-DC
CR
+DC
+ 24V DC IN
NOT
USED
VAC
VDC
O/0
VAC
VDC
O/1
CR
NOT
USED
NOT
USED
CR
DC
24V+
O/2
O/3
O/4
O/5
DC
24V-
L1c
L2c
L1d
L2d
L1e
L2e
VAC
VDC
O/5
NOT
USED
1763-L16DWD Output Wiring Diagram
+DCa
-DCa
L1a
L2a
L1b
L2b
-DC
CR
+DC
+ 12/24V DC IN
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
NOT
USED
VAC
VDC
O/0
VAC
VDC
O/1
VAC
VDC
O/2
CR
VAC
VDC
O/3
VAC
VDC
O/4
NOT
USED
Wiring Your Controller
Controller I/O Wiring
55
Minimizing Electrical Noise
Because of the variety of applications and environments where
controllers are installed and operating, it is impossible to ensure that
all environmental noise will be removed by input filters. To help
reduce the effects of environmental noise, install the MicroLogix 1100
system in a properly rated (for example, NEMA) enclosure. Make sure
that the MicroLogix 1100 system is properly grounded.
A system may malfunction due to a change in the operating
environment after a period of time. We recommend periodically
checking system operation, particularly when new machinery or other
noise sources are installed near the MicroLogix 1100 system.
Wiring Your Analog
Channels
Analog input circuits can monitor voltage signals and convert them to
serial digital data.
Sensor 2
(V) Voltage Sensor 1
(V) Voltage
IA
COM
IV1(+)
IV2(+)
Analog Channel Wiring Guidelines
Consider the following when wiring your analog channels:
• The analog common (COM) is connected to earth ground inside
the module. These terminals are not electrically isolated from the
system. They are connected to chassis ground.
• Analog channels are not isolated from each other.
• Use Belden™ 8761, or equivalent, shielded wire.
• Under normal conditions, the drain wire (shield) should be
connected to the metal mounting panel (earth ground). Keep
the shield connection to earth ground as short as possible.
• To ensure optimum accuracy for voltage type inputs, limit
overall cable impedance by keeping all analog cables as short as
possible. Locate the I/O system as close to your voltage type
sensors or actuators as possible.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
56
Wiring Your Controller
• The controller does not provide loop power for analog inputs.
Use a power supply that matches the transmitter specifications
as shown below.
2-Wire Transmitter
Power +
Supply -
3-Wire Transmitter
Power
Supply
Transmitter
+
-
Transmitter
Supply
Signal
GND
+
-
4-Wire Transmitter
Power +
Supply -
Transmitter
Supply
Signal
+
-
+
-
Controller
IV1(+) or IV2(+)
IA COM
Controller
IV1(+) or IV2(+)
IA COM
Controller
IV1(+) or IV2(+)
IA COM
Minimizing Electrical Noise on Analog Channels
Inputs on analog channels employ digital high-frequency filters that
significantly reduce the effects of electrical noise on input signals.
However, because of the variety of applications and environments
where analog controllers are installed and operated, it is impossible to
ensure that all environmental noise will be removed by the input
filters.
Several specific steps can be taken to help reduce the effects of
environmental noise on analog signals:
• install the MicroLogix 1100 system in a properly rated (i.e.,
NEMA) enclosure. Make sure that the MicroLogix 1100 system is
properly grounded.
• use Belden cable #8761 for wiring the analog channels, making
sure that the drain wire and foil shield are properly earth
grounded.
• route the Belden cable separately from any ac wiring. Additional
noise immunity can be obtained by routing the cables in
grounded conduit.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Wiring Your Controller
57
Grounding Your Analog Cable
Use shielded
communication cable
(Belden #8761). The
Belden cable has two
signal wires (black and
clear), one drain wire, and
a foil shield. The drain
wire and foil shield must
be grounded at one end of
the cable.
IMPORTANT
Foil Shield
Black Wire
Insulation
Clear Wire
Drain Wire
Do not ground the drain wire and foil shield at
both ends of the cable
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
58
Wiring Your Controller
Expansion I/O Wiring
Digital Wiring Diagrams
The following illustrations show the digital expansion I/O wiring
diagrams.
1762-IA8 Wiring Diagram
L1
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
100/120V ac
IN 4
IN 5
IN 6
IN 7
AC
COM
AC
COM
L2
Common
connected
internally.
1762-IQ8 Wiring Diagram
+DC (sinking)
-DC (sourcing)
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
24V dc
IN 4
IN 5
IN 6
IN 7
-DC (sinking)
+DC (sourcing)
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
DC
COM
DC
COM
Common connected
internally.
Wiring Your Controller
59
1762-IQ16 Wiring Diagram
+DC (Sinking)
-DC (Sourcing)
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
24V dc
IN 4
IN 5
IN 6
IN 7
DC
COM 0
+DC (Sinking)
-DC (Sourcing)
-DC (Sinking)
+DC (Sourcing)
IN 8
IN 9
IN 10
24V dc
IN 11
IN 12
IN 13
IN 14
IN 15
-DC (Sinking)
+DC (Sourcing)
DC
COM 1
1762-OA8 Wiring Diagram
OUT 0
CR
L2
L1
OUT 1
CR
OUT 3
CR
OUT 4
CR
L2
OUT 2
VAC
1
L1
VAC
0
CR
OUT 5
CR
OUT 6
OUT 7
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
60
Wiring Your Controller
1762-OB8 Wiring Diagram
+DC
+VDC
CR
OUT 0
CR
OUT 2
OUT 1
CR
OUT 3
CR
OUT 4
OUT 5
CR
OUT 6
CR
OUT 7
24V dc (source)
DC COM
-DC
1762-OB16 Wiring Diagram
VDC+
CR
OUT 0
CR
OUT 2
+DC
OUT 1
CR
OUT 3
CR
OUT 4
OUT 5
CR
OUT 6
CR
OUT 7
CR
OUT 8
CR
OUT 9
CR
OUT 11
CR
OUT 13
24V dc (source)
OUT 10
OUT 12
OUT 14
OUT 15
DC COM
-DC
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Wiring Your Controller
61
1762-OW8 Wiring Diagram
L1 VAC1 +
VAC-VDC 1
OUT 0
CR
L1 VAC2 +
L2 DC2 COM
OUT 1
CR
OUT3
CR
OUT 4
CR
L2 DC1 COM
OUT 2
VAC-VDC2
CR
OUT 5
CR
OUT 6
OUT 7
1762-OW16 Wiring Diagram
OUT 0
CR
L1
VAC-VDC
0
OUT 1
CR
OUT 3
CR
OUT 5
CR
L2
OUT 2
OUT 4
CR
OUT 6
CR
OUT 7
+DC
VAC-VDC
1
OUT 8
CR
OUT 9
CR
OUT 11
CR
OUT 13
CR
OUT 15
CR
-DC
OUT 10
OUT 12
CR
OUT 14
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
62
Wiring Your Controller
1762-OX6I Wiring Diagram
L1-0
L1 OR +DC
OUT0 N.C.
L1 OR +DC
OUT0 N.O.
CR
OUT1 N.C.
CR
L1-1
OUT1 N.O.
L2 OR -DC
L1-2
L2 OR -DC
L2 OR -DC
CR
L1 OR +DC
OUT2 N.C.
OUT2 N.O.
L1 OR +DC
L2 OR -DC
CR
L1 OR +DC
L1-3
OUT3 N.C.
OUT3 N.O.
L1-4
OUT4 N.C.
CR
OUT4 N.O.
L2 OR -DC
L1-5
CR
L1 OR +DC
OUT5 N.C.
L2 OR -DC
OUT5 N.O.
1762-IQ8OW6 Wiring Diagram
+DC (Sinking)
-DC (Sourcing)
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
+DC (Sinking)
-DC (Sourcing)
IN 4
-DC (Sinking)
+DC (Sourcing)
DC
COM 0
IN 5
IN 6
IN 7
DC
COM 1
-DC (Sinking)
+DC (Sourcing)
VAC
VDC
L1 or +DC
OUT 0
CR
Connected Internally
VAC
VDC
L1 or +DC
OUT 1
CR
OUT 3
CR
OUT 5
CR
OUT 2
OUT 4
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
L2 or -DC
Wiring Your Controller
63
Analog Wiring
Consider the following when wiring your analog modules:
• The analog common (COM) is not connected to earth ground
inside the module. All terminals are electrically isolated from the
system.
• Channels are not isolated from each other.
• Use Belden 8761, or equivalent, shielded wire.
• Under normal conditions, the drain wire (shield) should be
connected to the metal mounting panel (earth ground). Keep
the shield connection to earth ground as short as possible.
• To ensure optimum accuracy for voltage type inputs, limit
overall cable impedance by keeping all analog cables as short as
possible. Locate the I/O system as close to your voltage type
sensors or actuators as possible.
• The module does not provide loop power for analog inputs. Use
a power supply that matches the input transmitter specifications.
1762-IF2OF2 Input Type Selection
Select the input type, current or voltage, using the switches located on
the module’s circuit board and the input type/range selection bits in
the Configuration Data File. Refer to MicroLogix 1100 Programmable
Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication
1763-RM001. You can access the switches through the ventilation slots
on the top of the module. Switch 1 controls channel 0; switch 2
controls channel 1. The factory default setting for both switch 1 and
switch 2 is Current. Switch positions are shown below.
Ch0 Ch1
ON
Switch Location
1
2
Voltage (OFF)
Current (ON) Default
1762-IF2OF2 Output Type Selection
The output type selection, current or voltage, is made by wiring to the
appropriate terminals, Iout or Vout, and by the type/range selection
bits in the Configuration Data File. Refer to MicroLogix 1100
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
64
Wiring Your Controller
Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual,
publication 1763-RM001.
ATTENTION
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Analog outputs may fluctuate for less than a second
when power is applied or removed. This
characteristic is common to most analog outputs.
While the majority of loads will not recognize this
short signal, it is recommended that preventive
measures be taken to ensure that connected
equipment is not affected.
Wiring Your Controller
65
1762-IF2OF2 Wiring
The following illustration shows the 1762-IF2OF2 analog expansion
I/O terminal block.
1762-IF2OF2 Terminal Block Layout
IN 0 (+)
IN 0 (-)
IN 1 (+)
IN 1 (-)
V Out 0
I Out 0
V Out 1
I Out 1
COM
COM
Common connected
internally.
Differential Sensor Transmitter Types
IN 0 (+)
Analog Sensor
IN 0 (-)
IN 1 (+)
IN 1 (-)
Load
I out 0
I out 1
V out 0
V out 1
COM
COM
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
66
Wiring Your Controller
Single-ended Sensor/Transmitter Types
2-Wire Transmitter
Power +
Supply(1)-
Transmitter
+
Module
-
IN +
IN COM
3-Wire Transmitter
Transmitter
Supply
Signal
Module
Power +
Supply(1)-
IN +
IN COM
4-Wire Transmitter
Power +
Supply(1)-
Transmitter
Supply
Signal
+
-
Module
+
-
IN +
IN COM
(1) All power supplies rated N.E.C. Class 2.
1762-IF4 Input Type Selection
Select the input type, current or voltage, using the switches located on
the module’s circuit board and the input type/range selection bits in
the Configuration Data File. Refer to MicroLogix 1100 Programmable
Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001.
You can access the switches through the ventilation slots on the top of
the module.
Ch0 Ch1
Switch Location
ON
ON
Voltage (OFF)
1
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Ch2 Ch3
2
1
2
Current (ON Default)
Wiring Your Controller
67
1762-IF4 Terminal Block Layout
IN 0 (+)
IN 0 (-)
IN 1 (+)
IN 1 (-)
IN 2 (+)
IN 2 (-)
IN 3 (+)
IN 3 (-)
COM
Commons internally connected.
COM
Differential Sensor Transmitter Types
IN 0 (+)
Analog Sensor
IN 0 (-)
IN 1 (+)
IN 1 (-)
IN 2 (+)
IN 2 (-)
IN 3 (+)
IN 3 (-)
COM
COM
TIP
Grounding the cable shield at the module end only
usually provides sufficient noise immunity.
However, for best cable shield performance, earth
ground the shield at both ends, using a 0.01µF
capacitor at one end to block AC power ground
currents, if necessary.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
68
Wiring Your Controller
Sensor/Transmitter Types
2-Wire Transmitter
Transmitter
+
+
Supply (1) -
-
Power
Module
IN +
IN COM
Transmitter
3-Wire Transmitter
Supply
Signal
Power +
Supply(1) -
Module
IN +
IN COM
4-Wire Transmitter
Power +
Supply(1) -
Transmitter
Signal
Supply
+
-
+
-
Module
IN +
IN COM
(1) All power supplies rated N.E.C. Class 2.
1762-OF4 Output Type Selection
The output type selection, current or voltage, is made by wiring to the
appropriate terminals, Iout or Vout, and by the type/range selection
bits in the Configuration Data File.
1762-OF4 Terminal Block Layout
V out 0
I out 0
V out 1
I out 1
V out 2
I out 2
V out 3
I out 3
COM
COM
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Commons connected internally
Wiring Your Controller
69
1762-OF4 Wiring
I out 0
Current Load
I out 1
I out 2
I out 3
Voltage Load
V out 0
V out 1
V out 2
V out 3
COM
COM
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
70
Wiring Your Controller
Notes:
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Chapter
4
Communication Connections
This chapter describes how to communicate with your control system.
The method you use and cabling required to connect your controller
depends on what type of system you are employing. This chapter also
describes how the controller establishes communication with the
appropriate network. Topics include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
supported communication protocols
default communication configurations
using communications toggle functionality
connecting to RS-232 port
connecting to DH-485 network
connecting to AIC+
connecting to DeviceNet
connecting to Ethernet
The MicroLogix 1100 controllers provide two communication
channels, an isolated RS-232/485 communication port (Channel 0) and
an Ethernet port (Channel 1).
Supported Communication
Protocols
MicroLogix 1100 controllers support the following communication
protocols from the primary RS-232/485 communication channel,
Channel 0:
•
•
•
•
•
•
DH-485
DF1 Full-Duplex
DF1 Half-Duplex Master and Slave
DF1 Radio Modem
Modbus Master and Slave
ASCII
The Ethernet communication channel, Channel 1, allows your
controller to be connected to a local area network for various devices
providing 10 Mbps/100 Mbps transfer rate. MicroLogix 1100
controllers support CIP explicit messaging (message exchange).
MicroLogix 1100 controllers do not support Ethernet I/O master
capability through CIP implicit messaging (real-time I/O messaging).
71
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
72
Communication Connections
For more information on MicroLogix 1100 communications, refer to
the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set
Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001.
Default Communication
Configuration
The MicroLogix 1100 communication Channel 0 has the following
default communication configuration.
TIP
For Channel 0, the default configuration is present
when:
• The controller is powered-up for the first time.
• The communications toggle functionality
specifies default communications (specified using
the LCD Display. The DCOMM indicator on the
LCD Display is on, i.e., lit in solid rectangle).
• An OS upgrade is completed.
See Chapter 5 for more information about using the LCD Display.
See Appendix E for more information about communicating.
DF1 Full-Duplex Default Configuration Parameters
Using the Communications
Toggle Functionality
Parameter
Default
Baud Rate
19.2 KBps
Parity
none
Source ID (Node Address)
1
Control Line
no handshaking
Error Detection
CRC
Embedded Responses
auto detect
Duplicate Packet (Message) Detect
enabled
ACK Timeout
50 counts
NAK retries
3 retries
ENQ retries
3 retries
Stop Bits
1
Data Bits
8
The Communications Toggle Functionality can be operated using the
LCD display on the controller, as shown below.
Use the Communications Toggle Functionality to change from the
user-defined communication configuration to the default
communications mode and back on Channel 0. The Default
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Communication Connections
73
CO
M
M
CO 0
M
M
DC 1
OM
BA M
T.
U- LO
M
SG
Communications (DCOMM) indicator on the LCD display operates to
show when the controller is in the default communications mode
(settings shown on 72).
TIP
The Communication Toggle Functionality only
affects the communication configuration of
Channel 0.
Changing Communication Configuration
Follow the procedure below to change from the user-defined
communication configuration to the default communications mode
and back. In this example, we will start from the Main Menu screen of
the LCD display, as shown below. If necessary, press ESC repeatedly
until you return to the Main Menu screen.
1. On the Main Menu screen, select Advance Set by using the Up
and Down keys on the LCD keypad, as shown below. If the
menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the
Main Menu screen, you need to scroll down the screen by
pressing the Down key.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
74
Communication Connections
2. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The Advanced
Settings Menu screen is displayed, as shown below.
3. Select DCOMM Cfg using the Up and Down keys, as shown
below, and then press the OK key.
CO
M
M
CO 0
M
DC M1
OM
BA M
T.
U- LO
M
SG
4. The DCOMM Configuration screen is displayed, as shown
below. The current status, Disable in this example, is selected by
default.
The DCOMM status indicator, which is the third of the five
indicators at the top left of the LED display, is displayed in
empty rectangle. It means that the communication configuration
is set to a user-defined communication mode at present.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Communication Connections
75
CO
M
CO M0
M
M
DC 1
OM
BA M
T.
U- LO
M
SG
If the communication configuration is set to the default
communication mode, the DCOMM Configuration screen is
displayed as shown below. The DCOMM status indicator is
displayed in solid rectangle.
5. Use the up arrow to change the indicator position so that it is
pointing to Enable.Press the OK key to change to the default
communication mode. The DCOMM Mode Change Notification
screen is displayed, as shown below. It indicates that the
communication configuration is changed to the default
communication mode. The DCOMM status indicator is displayed
in solid rectangle.
If you change to the user-defined configuration from the default
configuration mode by selecting Disable and pressing the OK
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
76
Communication Connections
key, the DCOMM Mode Change Notification will be displayed as
shown below.
6. Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Settings Menu
screen, as shown in step 3.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Communication Connections
Connecting to the RS-232
Port
77
There are two ways to connect the MicroLogix 1100 programmable
controller to your personal computer using the DF1 protocol: using a
point-to-point connection, or using a modem. Descriptions of these
methods follow.
ATTENTION
All devices connected to the RS-232/485
communication port must be referenced to controller
ground, or be floating (not referenced to a potential
other than ground). Failure to follow this procedure
may result in property damage or personal injury.
• For 1763-L16BWA controllers, the COM of the
sensor supply is also connected to chassis ground
internally. The 24V dc sensor power source
should not be used to power output circuits. It
should only be used to power input devices.
• For 1763-L16BBB and 1763-L16DWD controllers,
the VDC NEUT or common terminal of the power
supply is also connected to chassis ground
internally.
Available Communication Cables
Communication Cables
Length
1761-CBL-AM00 Series C or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications.
45 cm (17.7 in.)
1761-CBL-AP00 Series C or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications.
45 cm (17.7 in.)
1761-CBL-PM02 Series C or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications.
2 m (6.5 ft)
1761-CBL-HM02 Series C or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications.
2 m (6.5 ft)
2707-NC9 Series C or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications.
15 m (49.2 ft)
1763-NC01 Series A or later
30 cm (11.8 in.)
ATTENTION
UNSUPPORTED CONNECTION
Do not connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to
another MicroLogix family controller such as
MicroLogix 1000, MicroLogix 1200, MicroLogix 1500,
or to the 1747-DPS1 Network port using a
1761-CBL-AM00 (8-pin mini-DIN to 8-pin mini-DIN)
cable or equivalent.
This type of connection will cause damage to the
RS-232/485 communication port (Channel 0) of the
MicroLogix 1100 and/or the controller itself.
Communication pins used for RS-485
communications are alternately used for 24V power
on the other MicroLogix controllers and the
1747-DPS1network port .
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
78
Communication Connections
Making a DF1 Point-to-Point Connection
You can connect the MicroLogix 1100 programmable controller to
your personal computer using a serial cable (1761-CBL-PM02) from
your personal computer’s serial port to the controller’s Channel 0. The
recommended protocol for this configuration is DF1 Full-Duplex.
You can connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to your personal
computer directly without using an external optical isolator, such as
Advanced Interface Converter (AIC+), catalog number 1761-NET-AIC,
as shown in the illustration below, because Channel 0 is isolated
within the controller.
MicroLogix 1100 Channel 0
Personal Computer
1761-CBL-AP00 or
1761-CBL-PM021)
(1) Series C or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications.
Using a Modem
You can use modems to connect a personal computer to one
MicroLogix 1100 controller (using DF1 Full-Duplex protocol), to
multiple controllers (using DF1 Half-Duplex protocol), or Modbus
RTU Slave protocol via Channel 0, as shown in the following
illustration. (See Appendix E for information on types of modems you
can use with the micro controllers.)
IMPORTANT
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Do not attempt to use DH-485 protocol through
modems under any circumstance. The
communication timing using DH-485 protocol is not
supported by modem communications.
Communication Connections
79
Personal Computer
Modem Cable
(straight-through)
MicroLogix 1100
Channel 0
Modem
Protocol Options
• DF1 Full-Duplex protocol (to 1 controller)
• DF1 Half-Duplex protocol (to multiple controllers)
• Modbus RTU Slave protocol
1761-CBL-AP00 or
1761-CBL-PM02(1)
(straight-through)
Modem
(1) Series C or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications.
You can connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to your modem directly
without using an external optical isolator, such as AIC+, catalog
number 1761-NET-AIC, as shown in the illustration below, because
Channel 0 is isolated within the controller.
MicroLogix 1100 Channel 0 to Modem Cable Pinout
When connecting MicroLogix 1100 Channel 0 to a modem using an
RS-232 cable, the maximum that the cable length may be extended is
15.24 m (50 ft).
DTE Device
(MicroLogix
1100
Channel 0)
DCE Device
(Modem,
PanelView,
etc.)
8-Pin
25-Pin
9-Pin
7
TXD
TXD
2
3
4
RXD
RXD
3
2
2
GND
GND
7
5
1
B(+)
DCD
8
1
8
A(-)
DTR
20
4
5
N.C.
DSR
6
6
6
CTS
CTS
5
8
3
RTS
RTS
4
7
ATTENTION
Do not connect pin 1,8, and 5. This connection will
cause damage to the RS-232/485 communication port
(channel 0) of the MicroLogix 1100 and/or the
controller itself.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
80
Communication Connections
Connecting to a DF1 Half-Duplex Network
When a communication port is configured for DF1 Half-Duplex Slave,
available parameters include the following:
DF1 Half-Duplex Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Options
Baud Rate
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2 KBps, 38.4 KBps
Parity
none, even
Node Address
0...254 decimal
Control Line
no handshaking, half duplex modem (RTS/CTS handshaking, no handshaking (485 network)
Error Detection
CRC, BCC
EOT Suppression
enabled, disabled
When EOT Suppression is enabled, the slave does not respond when polled if no message is queued. This
saves modem transmission power and time when there is no message to transmit.
Duplicate Packet (Message)
Detect
enabled, disabled
Detects and eliminates duplicate responses to a message. Duplicate packets may be sent under noisy
communication conditions if the sender’s Message Retries are not set to 0.
Poll Timeout (x20 ms)
0...65,535 (can be set in 20 ms increments)
Poll Timeout only applies when a slave device initiates a MSG instruction. It is the amount of time that
the slave device waits for a poll from the master device. If the slave device does not receive a poll within
the Poll Timeout, a MSG instruction error is generated, and the ladder program needs to requeue the MSG
instruction. If you are using a MSG instruction, it is recommended that a Poll Timeout value of zero not be
used. Poll Timeout is disabled when set to zero.
RTS Off Delay (x20 ms)
0...65,535 (can be set in 20 ms increments)
Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is
deactivated. Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet.
RTS Send Delay (x20 ms)
0...65,535 (can be set in 20 ms increments)
Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response. For use with modems
that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS.
Message Retries
0...255
Specifies the number of times a slave device attempts to resend a message packet when it does not
receive an ACK from the master device. For use in noisy environments where message packets may
become corrupted in transmission.
Pre Transmit Delay
(x1 ms)
0...65,535 (can be set in 1 ms increments)
• When the Control Line is set to no handshaking, this is the delay time before transmission.
Required for 1761-NET-AIC physical Half-Duplex networks. The 1761-NET-AIC needs delay time to
change from transmit to receive mode.
• When the Control Line is set to DF1 Half-Duplex Modem, this is the minimum time delay between
receiving the last character of a packet and the RTS assertion.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Communication Connections
81
DF1 Half-Duplex Master-Slave Network
Use the following diagram for DF1 Half-Duplex Master-Slave protocol
without hardware handshaking.
SLC 5/03
processor
MicroLogix 1100
DF1
Master
CH0
(3)
(1)
CH0
1761-CBL-AM00 or 1761-CBL-HM02(4)
1761-CBL-AP00 or 1761-CBL-PM02(4)
DF1 Slave
(2)
radio modem
or lease line
straight 9-25 pin cable
(3)
AIC+
(1)
straight 9-25
pin cable
24V dc power (User Supplied)
radio
modem or
lease line
1763-NC01 (daisy chain) to AIC+(4)
1763-NC01 (daisy chain) to AIC+(4)
MicroLogix 1100
CH0
CH0
DF1 Slave
RS-485 DF1 Half-Duplex
(2)
MicroLogix 1100
DF1 Slave
RS-485 DF1 Half-Duplex
(1) DB-9 RS-232 port
(2) mini-DIN 8 RS-232 port
(3) RS-485 port
(4) Series C or later cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
82
Communication Connections
DF1 Half-Duplex Network (Using PC and Modems)
Rockwell Software RSLinx 2.0 (or
higher), SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04,
SLC 5/05, PLC-5, or MicroLogix
1000, 1200, and 1500 processors
configured for DF1Half-Duplex
Master. Rockwell Software RSLinx
2.5 required for MicroLogix 1100.
DF1 Half-Duplex Protocol
Modem
TERM
TERM
A
TERM
A
B
A
B
COM
B
COM
SHLD
COM
SHLD
CHS GND
TX
TX
SHLD
CHS GND
TX
TX
PWR
TX
DC SOURCE
PWR
CABLE
EXTERNAL
MicroLogix
1000 (Slave)
CHS GND
TX
DC SOURCE
CABLE
EXTERNAL
MicroLogix
1100 (Slave)
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
MicroLogix
1200 (Slave)
TX
TX
TX
PWR
DC SOURCE
CABLE
EXTERNAL
MicroLogix 1500 with
1764-LSP or 1764-LRP
Processor (Slave)
MicroLogix 1500 with
1764-LRP Processor (Slave)
SLC 5/03 (Slave)
Communication Connections
Connecting to a DH-485
Network
83
The network diagrams on the next pages provide examples of how to
connect MicroLogix 1100 controllers to the DH-485 network.
You can connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to your DH-485
network directly without using an external optical isolator, such as
Advanced Interface Converter (AIC+), catalog number 1761-NET-AIC,
as shown in the illustrations below, because Channel 0 is isolated
within the controller.
TIP
Use a 1763-NC01 Series A or later (8-pin mini-DIN to
6-pin DH-485 connector) cable or equivalent to
connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to a DH-485
network.
We recommend that you use a 1747-UIC USB interface to connect
your PC to a DH-485 network. For more information on the 1747-UIC,
see the Universal Serial Bus to DH-485 Interface Converter Installation
Instructions, Publication 1747-IN063.
DH-485 Configuration Parameters
When MicroLogix communications are configured for DH-485, the
following parameters can be changed:
DF1 Full-Duplex Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Options
Baud Rate
9600, 19.2 KBps
Node Address
1...31 decimal
Token Hold Factor
1...4
See Software Considerations on page 212 for tips on setting the
parameters listed above.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
84
Communication Connections
DH-485 Network with a MicroLogix 1100 Controller
AIC+
AIC+
TERM
TERM
A
B
COM
COM
SHLD
SHLD
CHS GND
TX
TX
A-B
A
B
TX
PWR
TX
DC SOURCE
TX
PWR
DC SOURCE
CABLE
CABLE
EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL
SLC 5/04
PanelView 550
DH-485 Network
AIC+
AIC+
TERM
TX
PWR
TX
DC SOURCE
TX
PWR
TX
MicroLogix 1000
TX
PWR
TX
DH-485 Network
EXTERNAL
Personal
Computer
MicroLogix 1200
Belden, shielded, twisted-pair cable
Belden, shielded, twisted-pair cable
AIC+
(2)
TERM
1763-NC01(4)
A
(3)
B
COM
SHLD
CHS GND
TX
TX
TX
PWR
DC SOURCE
CABLE
(1)
1761-CBL-AP00 or
1761-CBL-PM02
EXTERNAL
OK
24V dc (user supplied)
port 1 or port 2
to PC
1747-CP3
or 1761-CBL-AC00
(1) DB-9 RS-232 port
(2) mini-DIN 8 RS-232 port
(3) RS-485 port
(4) Series A or later cables are required.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
PWR
CABLE
EXTERNAL
OK
MicroLogix 1100
ESC
TX
DC SOURCE
CABLE
EXTERNAL
ESC
CHS GND
TX
DC SOURCE
CABLE
EXTERNAL
SHLD
CHS GND
TX
DC SOURCE
CABLE
COM
SHLD
CHS GND
TX
B
COM
SHLD
CHS GND
A
B
COM
SHLD
TERM
A
B
COM
TX
TERM
A
B
AIC+
AIC+
TERM
A
TX
PanelView
CHS GND
TX
MicroLogix 1500
Communication Connections
85
Typical 3-Node Network (Channel 0 Connection)
PanelView 550
A-B
PanelView
RJ45 port
1761-CBL-AS09
or 1761-CBL-AS03
CH0
MicroLogix 1100
TERM
A
B
COM
SHLD
CHS GND
TX
TX
TX
PWR
DC SOURCE
CABLE
EXTERNAL
1761-CBL-AM00
or 1761-CBL-HM02
1747-CP3 or
1761-CBL-AC00
Recommended Tools
To connect a DH-485 network to additional devices, you need tools to
strip the shielded cable and to attach the cable to the AIC+ Advanced
Interface Converter. We recommend the following equipment (or
equivalent):
Working with Cable for DH-485 Network
Description
Part Number
Manufacturer
Shielded Twisted Pair Cable
#3106A or #9842
Belden
Stripping Tool
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
1/8” Slotted Screwdriver
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
DH-485 Communication Cable
The suggested DH-485 communication cable is either Belden #3106A
or #9842. The cable is jacketed and shielded with one or two
twisted-wire pairs and a drain wire.
One pair provides a balanced signal line and one additional wire is
used for a common reference line between all nodes on the network.
The shield reduces the effect of electrostatic noise from the industrial
environment on network communication.
The communication cable consists of a number of cable segments
daisy-chained together. The total length of the cable segments cannot
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
86
Communication Connections
exceed 1219 m (4000 ft). However, two segments can be used to
extend the DH-485 network to 2438 m (8000 ft). For additional
information on connections using the AIC+, refer to the Advanced
Interface Converter (AIC+) User Manual, publication 1761-6.4.
When cutting cable segments, make them long enough to route them
from one AIC+ to the next, with sufficient slack to prevent strain on
the connector. Allow enough extra cable to prevent chafing and
kinking in the cable.
Use these instructions for wiring the Belden #3106A or #9842 cable.
(See Cable Selection Guide on page 90 if you are using standard
Allen-Bradley cables.)
Connecting the Communication Cable to the DH-485 Connector
TIP
A daisy-chained network is recommended. Do not
make the incorrect connection shown below:
Belden #3106A
or #9842
Connector
Belden #3106A or Belden #3106A or
#9842
#9842
Connector
Connector
Incorrect
Single Cable Connection
When connecting a single cable to the DH-485 connector, use the
following diagram.
Orange with White Stripes
White with Orange Stripes
Shrink Tubing Recommended
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
6 Termination
5A
4B
3 Common
2 Shield
1 Chassis Ground
Blue (#3106A) or
Blue with White Drain Wire
Stripes (#9842)
Communication Connections
87
Multiple Cable Connection
When connecting multiple cables to the DH-485 connector, use the
following diagram.
to Previous Device
to Next Device
Connections using Belden #3106A Cable
For this Wire/Pair
Connect this Wire
To this Terminal
Shield/Drain
Non-jacketed
Terminal 2 - Shield
Blue
Blue
Terminal 3 - (Common)
White/Orange
White with Orange Stripe
Terminal 4 - (Data B)
Orange with White Stripe
Terminal 5 - (Data A)
Connections using Belden #9842 Cable
For this Wire/Pair
Connect this Wire
To this Terminal
Shield/Drain
Non-jacketed
Terminal 2 - Shield
Blue/White
White with Blue Stripe
Cut back - no connection(1)
Blue with White Stripe
Terminal 3 - (Common)
White with Orange Stripe
Terminal 4 - (Data B)
Orange with White Stripe
Terminal 5 - (Data A)
White/Orange
(1)
To prevent confusion when installing the communication cable, cut back the white with blue stripe wire
immediately after the insulation jacket is removed. This wire is not used by DH-485.
Grounding and Terminating the DH-485 Network
Only one connector at the end of the link must have Terminals 1 and
2 jumpered together. This provides an earth ground connection for
the shield of the communication cable.
Both ends of the network must have Terminals 5 and 6 jumpered
together, as shown below. This connects the termination impedance
(of 120 ohm) that is built into each AIC+ or the 1763-NC01 cable as
required by the DH-485 specification.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
88
Communication Connections
End-of-Line Termination
Jumper
Jumper
Belden #3106A or #9842 Cable
1219 m (4000ft) Maximum
Jumper
MicroLogix 1100 Channel 0 to DH-485 Communication Cable Pinout
When connecting MicroLogix 1100 Channel 0 to DH-485
communication cable pinout using an RS-232 cable, the maximum that
the cable length may be extended is 15.24 m (50 ft). Refer to the
following typical pinout:
Connecting the AIC+
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
DTE Device
(MicroLogix
1100
Channel 0)
DCE Device (DH-485
connector)
8-Pin
6-pin
7
TXD
6
Termination
4
RXD
5
A
2
GND
4
B
1
B(+)
3
Common
8
A(-)
2
Shield
5
N.C.
1
ChassisGround
6
CTS
3
RTS
You can connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to a DH-485 network
via Channel 0 directly without using an optical isolator, such as AIC+,
catalog number 1761-NET-AIC, because Channel 0 is isolated.
However, you need to use an AIC+ to connect your PC or other
MicroLogix Family products, such as MicroLogix 1200, to a DH-485
network.
Communication Connections
89
The following figure shows the external wiring connections and
specifications of the AIC+.
3
2
AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter
(1761-NET-AIC)
4
1
5
Item
Description
1
Port 1 - DB-9 RS-232, DTE
2
Port 2 - mini-DIN 8 RS-232 DTE
3
Port 3 - RS-485 Phoenix plug
4
DC Power Source selector switch
(cable = port 2 power source,
external = external power source connected to item 5)
5
Terminals for external 24V dc power supply and chassis ground
For additional information on connecting the AIC+, refer to the
Advanced Interface Converter (AIC+) User Manual, publication
1761-UM00.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
90
Communication Connections
Cable Selection Guide
1761-CBL-PM02 (2)
1761-CBL-AP00(2)
Cable
Length
Connections from
to AIC+
External
Power Supply
Required(1)
Power
Selection
Switch
Setting(1)
1761-CBL-AP00(2)
1761-CBL-PM02(2)
45 cm (17.7 in.)
SLC 5/03 or SLC 5/04 processors, ch 0
port 2
yes
external
2 m (6.5 ft)
MicroLogix 1000, 1200, or 1500 ch 0
port 1
yes
external
MicroLogix 1100 ch 0
port 1
yes
external
PanelView 550 through NULL modem
adapter
port 2
yes
external
DTAM Plus / DTAM Micro
port 2
yes
external
PC COM port
port 2
yes
external
(1)
External power supply required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device connected to port 2, then the selection switch should be set to cable.
(2)
Series C or later cables are required.
1761-CBL-HM02(2)
1761-CBL-AM00(2)
Cable
Length
Connections from
to AIC+ External
Power Supply
Required(1)
Power
Selection
Switch Setting
1761-CBL-AM00(2)
1761-CBL-HM02(2)
45 cm (17.7 in.)
2 m (6.5 ft)
MicroLogix 1000, 1200, or 1500 ch 0
port 2
no
cable
MicroLogix 1100 ch 0
port 2
Yes
external
to port 2 on another AIC+
port 2
yes
external
(1)
External power supply required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device connected to port 2, then the selection switch should be set to cable.
(2)
Series C or later cables are required.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Communication Connections
91
1747-CP3
1761-CBL-AC00
Cable
Length
Connections from
to AIC+ External
Power Supply
Required(1)
Power
Selection
Switch
Setting(1)
1747-CP3
3 m (9.8 ft)
SLC 5/03 or SLC 5/04 processor, channel
0
port 1
yes
external
1761-CBL-AC00(1)
45 cm (17.7 in.)
PC COM port
port 1
yes
external
PanelView 550 through NULL modem
adapter
port 1
yes
external
DTAM Plus / DTAM Micro™
port 1
yes
external
Port 1 on another AIC+
port 1
yes
external
(1)
External power supply required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device connected to port 2, then the selection switch should be set to cable.
user-supplied cable
Cable
Length
Connections from
to AIC+ External
Power Supply
Required(1)
Power
Selection
Switch
Setting(1)
straight 9-25 pin
—
modem or other communication device
port 1
external
(1)
yes
External power supply required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device connected to port 2, then the selection switch should be set to cable.
1761-CBL-AS09
1761-CBL-AS03
Cable
Length
Connections from
to AIC+ External
Power Supply
Required(1)
Power
Selection
Switch
Setting(1)
1761-CBL-AS03
3 m (9.8 ft)
SLC 500 Fixed,
port 3
yes
external
1761-CBL-AS09
9.5 m (31.17 ft)
SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, and SLC 5/03
processors
port 3
yes
external
PanelView 550 RJ45 port
(1)
External power supply required unless the AIC+ is powered by the device connected to port 2, then the selection switch should be set to cable.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
92
Communication Connections
1761-CBL-PM02 Series C (or equivalent) Cable Wiring Diagram
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
6 78
3
5
4
Programming
Device
Controller
9-Pin D-Shell
8-Pin Mini Din
9
RI
24V
1
8
CTS
GND
2
7
RTS
RTS
3
6
DSR
RXD
4
5
GND
DCD
5
4
DTR
CTS
6
3
TXD
TXD
7
2
RXD
GND
8
1
DCD
1 2
Recommended User-Supplied Components
These components can be purchased from your local electronics
supplier.
User Supplied Components
Component
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Recommended Model
external power supply and chassis ground
power supply rated for 20.4...28.8V dc
NULL modem adapter
standard AT
straight 9-25 pin RS-232 cable
see table below for port information if
making own cables
Communication Connections
93
1761-CBL-AP00 or 1761-CBL-PM02
Port 1
DB-9 RS-232
7
1
2
8
3
4
9
5
6
Port 2
cable straight D connector
6 7 8
6
Port 3
RS-485 connector
5
4
3
5
3
4
2
1
1 2
AIC+ Terminals
Pin Port 1: DB-9 RS-232
Port 3: RS-485
Connector
1
chassis ground
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Port 2(2): (1761-CBL-PM02
cable)
received line signal detector 24V dc
(DCD)
received data (RxD)
ground (GND)
transmitted data (TxD)
request to send (RTS)
DTE ready (DTR)(1)
signal common (GND)
received data (RxD)(3)
received line signal detector
(DCD)
DCE ready (DSR)(1)
request to send (RTS)
clear to send (CTS)
not applicable
clear to send (CTS)(3)
transmitted data (TxD)
ground (GND)
not applicable
cable shield
signal ground
DH-485 data B
DH-485 data A
termination
not applicable
not applicable
not applicable
(1)
On port 1, pin 4 is electronically jumpered to pin 6. Whenever the AIC+ is powered on, pin 4 will match the
state of pin 6.
(2)
An 8-pin mini DIN connector is used for making connections to port 2. This connector is not commercially
available. If you are making a cable to connect to port 2, you must configure your cable to connect to the
Allen-Bradley cable shown above.
(3)
In the 1761-CBL-PM02 cable, pins 4 and 6 are jumpered together within the DB-9 connector.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
94
Communication Connections
Safety Considerations
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B,
C, D or non-hazardous locations only.
WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
AIC+ must be operated from an external power
source.
This product must be installed in an enclosure. All
cables connected to the product must remain in the
enclosure or be protected by conduit or other
means.
See Safety Considerations on page 21 for additional information.
Install and Attach the AIC+
1. Take care when installing the AIC+ in an enclosure so that the
cable connecting the MicroLogix controller to the AIC+ does not
interfere with the enclosure door.
2. Carefully plug the terminal block into the RS-485 port on the
AIC+ you are putting on the network. Allow enough cable slack
to prevent stress on the plug.
3. Provide strain relief for the Belden cable after it is wired to the
terminal block. This guards against breakage of the Belden cable
wires.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Communication Connections
95
Powering the AIC+
MicroLogix 100, 1200, and 1500 programmable controllers support
24V dc communication power on Channel 0. When connected to the
8 pin mini-DIN connector on the 1761-NET-AIC, 1761-NET-ENI, and
the 1761-NET-ENIW, these controllers provide the power for the
interface converter modules. The MicroLogix 1100 does not provide
24V dc communication power. Instead these pins are used to provide
RS-485 communications directly. Any AIC+, ENI, or ENIW not
connected to a MicroLogix 1000, 1200, or 1500 controller requires a
24V dc power supply.
If both the controller and external power are connected to the AIC+,
the power selection switch determines what device powers the AIC+.
ATTENTION
If you use an external power supply, it must be
24V dc (-15%/+20%). Permanent damage results if a
higher voltage supply is used.
Set the DC Power Source selector switch to EXTERNAL before
connecting the power supply to the AIC+. The following illustration
shows where to connect external power for the AIC+.
Bottom View
24V DC
DC
NEUT
CHS
GND
ATTENTION
Always connect the CHS GND (chassis ground)
terminal to the nearest earth ground. This connection
must be made whether or not an external 24V dc
supply is used.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
96
Communication Connections
Power Options
Below are two options for powering the AIC+:
• Use the 24V dc user power supply built into the MicroLogix
1000, 1200, or 1500 controller. The AIC+ is powered through a
hard-wired connection using a communication cable
(1761-CBL-HM02, or equivalent) connected to port 2.
• Use an external DC power supply with the following
specifications:
– operating voltage: 24V dc (-15%/+20%)
– output current: 150 mA minimum
– rated NEC Class 2
Make a hard-wired connection from the external supply to the
screw terminals on the bottom of the AIC+.
ATTENTION
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
If you use an external power supply, it must be 24V
dc (-15%/+20%). Permanent damage results if
miswired with the wrong power source.
Communication Connections
Connecting to DeviceNet
97
You can connect a MicroLogix 1100 as a slave to a DeviceNet network
using the DeviceNet Interface (DNI), catalog number 1761-NET-DNI.
For additional information on using the DNI, refer to the DeviceNet
Interface User Manual, publication 1761-UM005. The following figure
shows the external wiring connections of the DNI.
V–
CAN_L
NET
SHIELD
CAN_H
V+
DeviceNet Node (Port 1)
(Replacement connector
part no. 1761-RPL-RT00)
Use this write-on
area to mark the
DeviceNet node
address.
MOD
NODE
DANGER
TX/RX
GND
RS-232 (Port 2)
Cable Selection Guide(1)
1761-CBL-HM02
1761-CBL-AM00
Cable
Length
Connections from
to DNI
1761-CBL-AM00
1761-CBL-HM02
45 cm (17.7 in.)
2 m (6.5 ft)
MicroLogix 1000
port 2
MicroLogix 1100
port 2
MicroLogix 1200
port 2
MicroLogix 1500
port 2
1761-CBL-PM02
1761-CBL-AP00
Cable
Length
Connections from
to DNI
1761-CBL-AP00
1761-CBL-PM02
45 cm (17.7 in.)
2 m (6.5 ft)
SLC 5/03 or SLC 5/04 processors,
channel 0
port 2
PC COM port
port 2
1764-LRP processor, channel 1
port 2
(1)
Series C (or later) cables are required.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
98
Communication Connections
Connecting to Ethernet
You can connect directly a MicroLogix 1100 to an Ethernet network
via the Ethernet port (Channel 1). You do not need to use an Ethernet
interface card, such as the Ethernet Interface (ENI) and (ENIW),
catalog number 1761-NET-ENI and 1761-NET-ENIW, to connect your
MicroLogix 1100 controller to an Ethernet network. For additional
information on connecting to an Ethernet network, see Appendix F.
Ethernet Port (Channel 1)
RS-232/485 Port (Channel 0)
Ethernet Connections
The Ethernet connector, Channel 1, is an RJ45, 10/100Base-T
connector. The pin-out for the connector is shown below.
Pin
Pin Name
1
Tx+
2
Tx-
3
Rx+
4
not used by 10/100Base-T
5
not used by 10/100Base-T
6
Rx-
7
not used by 10/100Base-T
8
not used by 10/100Base-T
End view of RJ 45 Plug
Looking into a RJ45 Jack
12345678
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
87654321
Communication Connections
99
When to use straight-through and cross-over cable:
• MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet port to 10/100Base-T Ethernet switch
cables utilize a straight-through pin-out (1-1, 2-2, 3-3, 6-6).
• Direct point-to-point 10/100 Base-T cables connecting the
MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet port directly to another Ethernet port
(or a computer 10/100Base-T port) require a cross-over pin-out
(1-3, 2-6, 3-1, 6-2).
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
100
Communication Connections
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Chapter
5
Using the LCD
This chapter describes how to use the LCD and keypad on the
MicroLogix 1100 controller. Topics include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
operating principles
I/O status display
monitoring bit file
monitoring integer file
using the mode switch
using a user defined LCD screen
changing key in mode
using communications toggle functionality
viewing Ethernet port configuration
using trim pots
viewing system information
viewing fault code
The LCD and keypad are shown below.
Top View
1
2
ESC
OK
LCD and Keypad
101
Feature
Description
1
LCD
2
LCD Screen Keypad
(ESC, OK, Up, Down, Left, and Right Buttons)
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
102
Using the LCD
Operating Principles
MicroLogix 1100 LCD Menu Structure Tree
Startup Screen
yes
User Defined?
no
Main Menu
I/O Status
Monitoring
Bit
Mode Switch
Integer
User Displ
Advance Set
KeyIn Mode
DCOMM Cfg
ENET Cfg
TrimPot Set
System Info
Fault Code
User Defined Menu
LCD Instruction Interface
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
The ESC key is hold down more than 3 sec.
Using the LCD
103
Startup Screen
The Startup screen is displayed whenever the controller is powered
up.
LCD Default Startup Screen
You can customize this Startup screen in your application program by
defining a string data file that contains the string to display on the
Startup screen and specifying the CBS element of the LCD Function
File to the address of this string file.
The screen shown below is an example of a customized Startup
screen.
For more information on how to create and use a customized Startup
screen, refer to the LCD Function File described in the MicroLogix
1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual,
publication 1763-RM001.
After the default Startup screen or your customized Startup screen is
displayed for 3 seconds, either the default screen (the I/O Status
screen) is displayed by default, or a user defined screen is displayed if
your application uses a custom default screen.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
104
Using the LCD
Main Menu and Default Screen
The Main menu consists of five menu items: I/O Status, Monitoring,
Mode Switch, User Displ, and Advance Set.
LCD Main Menu
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using the LCD
105
:
Main Menu Items
Menu Item
Description
For details, refer to
I/O Status
Displays the I/O Status screen, which shows the I/O status
of the embedded digital I/O.
I/O Status on page 5-109
Monitoring
Allows you to view and change the data value of a bit and an
integer file.
Monitoring Bit File on page 5-111
Monitoring Integer File on page 5-117
Mode Switch
Allows you to change the mode switch selection.
Using the Mode Switch on page 5-125
User Displ
Displays the user defined LCD screen
Using a User Defined LCD Screen on page 5-128
Advance Set
Allows you to configure or view the following:
• Change the key in mode for value entry for a trim pot.
• Changing Key In Mode on page 5-131
• Use the communications toggle functionality.
• Using Communications Toggle Functionality
on page 5-134
• View the Ethernet port configuration.
• Viewing Ethernet Port Configuration on
page 5-134
• Change the data value of trim pots.
• Using Trim Pots on page 5-136
• View system information, such as OS series and
firmware version.
• I/O Status on page 5-109
LCD Default Screen - I/O Status Screen
CO
M
CO M0
M
M
DC 1
OM
BA M
T.
U- LO
M
SG
.
This is the default screen of the display, allowing you to monitor
controller and I/O Status. For more information on the I/O Status
screen, see I/O Status on page 5-109.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
106
Using the LCD
Operating Buttons
ESC
OK
Button
Function
Cursor
Buttons
Move cursor
Select menu item
Choose file numbers, values, etc.
OK
Next menu level, store your entry, apply the
changes
ESC
Previous menu level, cancel your entry
Using Menus to Choose Values
Press
To
• Go to next menu level.
OK
• Store your entry.
• Apply the changes.
• Go to previous menu level.
ESC
• Cancel your entry since the last Ok.
• Press repeatedly to go to the main menu.
• Change menu item.
• Change value.
• Change position.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using the LCD
107
Selecting Between Menu Items
Cursor up or down
OK
Apply or Enter
The symbol " " is used as the cursor.
Cursor Display
There are two different cursor types:
Selection cursor (the symbol “ ”) is displayed left
to the selected item.
• Move cursor with the up/down arrows
Full block navigation is shown as a flashing block:
• Change position with left/right arrows
• Change values with up/down arrows
Flashing value is presented as an empty rectangle for explanation purpose.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
108
Using the LCD
Setting Values
Change value = up/down arrows
Move cursor between digits = left/right arrows
OK
ESC
Stores Entries
Retain previous value
Left/right arrow moves the cursor between the digits of the
value (+02714).
Up/down arrow changes the value.
Up arrow = increment
Down arrow = decrement
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using the LCD
The MicroLogix 1100 provides I/O status indicators on the LCD
screen. You can view the status of inputs and outputs on the I/O
Status screen on the LCD, as shown below. The I/O status indicators
on this screen are updated every 100 ms to reflect the current I/O
status in real time, regardless of controller scan time.
.
CO
M
CO M0
M
M
DC 1
OM
BA M
T.
U- L O
M
SG
I/O Status
109
Input status indicators (10)
Output status indicators (6)
A solid rectangle is displayed when the input or output is energized.
An empty rectangle is displayed when the input or output is not
energized.
IMPORTANT
If no user defined LCD screen is used, the I/O Status
screen is displayed,
• 5 seconds after the controller has powered-up.
• When the user enters the I/O Status screen from
other screen using the LCD menu. If you are at
other screen and want to view I/O status, you
have to enter the I/O Status screen manually
using the menu. Otherwise, the current screen
will be displayed continuously.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
110
Using the LCD
IMPORTANT
If a user defined LCD screen is used, the I/O S
sctatus sreen is displayed,
• When the user holds down the ESC key for more
than 3 seconds.
• When time out is enabled, i.e., the time out
period is set to a positive value, and the time out
period is passed. You can enable and disable
time out and set the time out period using the TO
element in the LCD Function File. For more
information, refer to the LCD Function File
described in the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable
Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual,
publication 1763-RM001.
• If time out is disabled, i.e., the time out period is
set to zero (0), and a custom LCD screen is
displayed, it will be displayed continuously until
the user gives an input to change to other screen.
For more information, see Using a User Defined
LCD Screen on page 5-128.
Viewing I/O Status
Follow these steps to view the status of inputs and outputs on the
LCD.
1. On the Main Menu screen, select I/O Status by using the Up and
Down keys on the LCD keypad, as shown below.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using the LCD
111
2. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The I/O Status
screen is displayed, as shown below.
3. If you have finished viewing I/O status, press the ESC key to
return to the Main Menu screen, as shown in step 1.
Monitoring Bit File
The LCD allows you to view and change the data values of 48 bits in a
user defined file. You can access to this functionality via the
Monitoring screen of the LCD.
To monitor the bit file on the LCD, you have to specify its file number
in the Target Bit File Number (TBF) element of the LCD Function File
and download your application program to the controller. The TBF
element can only be changed by a program download.
Target Bit File Number (TBF)
Feature
Address
Data Format Type
User Program
Access
Target Bit File Number
LCD:0.TBF
Word (int)
Read Only
Control
The value stored in the TBF element identifies the bit file with which
the LCD will interface. Valid bit files are B3, and B10 through B255.
When the LCD reads a valid bit file number, it can access up to the
first 48 bits (0 to 47) of the specified file on the LCD screen. The next
48 bits in the target bit file (48 to 95) are used to define the read-only
or read/write privileges for the first 48 bits.
The only bit file that the LCD interfaces with is the file specified in the
TBF element.
IMPORTANT
Use your programming software to ensure that the
bit file you specify in the TBF element, as well as the
appropriate number of elements, exist in the
MicroLogix 1100 user program.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
112
Using the LCD
The example table below shows how the LCD uses the configuration
information with bit file number 3 (LCD:0.TBF=3).
Bit Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Data Address
B3:0/0
B3:0/1
B3:0/2
B3:0/3
B3:0/4
B3:0/5
B3:0/6
B3:0/7
B3:0/8
B3:0/9
B3:0/10
B3:0/11
B3:0/12
B3:0/13
B3:0/14
B3:0/15
Protection Bit
B3:3/0
B3:3/1
B3:3/2
B3:3/3
B3:3/4
B3:3/5
B3:3/6
B3:3/7
B3:3/8
B3:3/9
B3:3/10
B3:3/11
B3:3/12
B3:3/13
B3:3/14
B3:3/15
Bit Number
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Data Address
B3:1/0
B3:1/1
B3:1/2
B3:1/3
B3:1/4
B3:1/5
B3:1/6
B3:1/7
B3:1/8
B3:1/9
B3:1/10
B3:1/11
B3:1/12
B3:1/13
B3:1/14
B3:1/15
Protection Bit
B3:4/0
B3:4/1
B3:4/2
B3:4/3
B3:4/4
B3:4/5
B3:4/6
B3:4/7
B3:4/8
B3:4/9
B3:4/10
B3:4/11
B3:4/12
B3:4/13
B3:4/14
B3:4/15
Bit Number
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Data Address
B3:2/0
B3:2/1
B3:2/2
B3:2/3
B3:2/4
B3:2/5
B3:2/6
B3:2/7
B3:2/8
B3:2/9
B3:2/10
B3:2/11
B3:2/12
B3:2/13
B3:2/14
B3:2/15
Protection Bit
B3:5/0
B3:5/1
B3:5/2
B3:5/3
B3:5/4
B3:5/5
B3:5/6
B3:5/7
B3:5/8
B3:5/9
B3:5/10
B3:5/11
B3:5/12
B3:5/13
B3:5/14
B3:5/15
The bit number displayed on the LCD corresponds to the data address
as illustrated in the table. The protection bit defines whether the data
is editable or read-only. When the protection bit is set (1), the
corresponding data address is considered read-only by the LCD. The
“Protected!” message is displayed whenever a read-only element is
active on the LCD. When the protection bit is clear (0) or the
protection bit does not exist, no additional message is displayed and
the data within the corresponding address is editable from the LCD
keypad.
IMPORTANT
TIP
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Although the LCD does not allow protected data to
be changed from its keypad, the control program or
other communication devices do have access to this
data. Protection bits only provide LCD write
protection. They do not provide any overwrite
protection to data from ladder logic, HMI, or
programming software. It is the users responsibility
to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten.
• Remaining addresses within the target file can be
used without restrictions (addresses B3:6/0 and
above, in this example).
• The LCD always starts at bit 0 of a data file. It
cannot start at any other address within the file.
Using the LCD
113
Monitoring a Bit File
For explanations in this section, we assume the followings in the
application program:
• A bit file B3, which is 7 elements long (7 words = 112 bits), is
defined with the preset data, as shown in the screen capture
below.
data bits (first 48 bits), which
are monitored on the LCD
and maskable by protection bits
protection bits (second 48 bits)
data bits (after the first 96 bits), which
are not monitored on the LCD and not
maskable by protection bits
• The TBF element of the LCD Function File is set to 3 to specify
the bit file B3 as the target bit file to monitor on the LCD, as
shown in the screen capture below.
• The controller mode is set to REMOTE RUN.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
114
Using the LCD
Follow these steps to view and change the data values of the bit file
B3.
1. On the Main Menu screen, select Monitoring by using the Up
and Down keys on the LCD keypad.
2. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The Bit/Integer File
Select screen is displayed, as shown below.
3. If Bit is selected, as shown in step 2, press the OK key.
If not selected, press the Up or Down key to select it and then
press the OK key.
4. The current data value (ON) of the B3:0/0 bit is displayed, as
shown below. Note that “0/0” is flashing, which means the
cursor is at the target bit position.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using the LCD
115
5. We will change the data value of the B3:0/0 bit to OFF (0).
First, press OK to select the displayed address and move the
cursor to the data value position. Then, “ON” will be flashing,
which means the cursor is at the data value position.
6. Press the Down key. Then, the data value will be represented as
“OFF”. Note that “OFF” is still flashing, which means the cursor
is still at the data value position.
7. Press OK to apply the changes. Then, the new value OFF (0) is
applied. Note that the target bit, “0/0” in this example, is
flashing. The cursor is moved automatically to the target bit
position.
You can identify this change of data value is reflected to your
RSLogix 500 programming software.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
116
Using the LCD
TIP
When the cursor is at the data value position, press
the Down key to change the data value of a bit from
ON (1) to OFF (0). Press the Up key to change from
OFF (0) to ON (1).
After changing the data value of a target bit, press
the OK key to apply the changes or press the ESC
key to discard the changes.
8. Now, we will view an example of the data value of a protected
bit, B3:0/2. Press the Up key twice. Then, the target bit will
change to “0/2” and its data value is displayed with the
“Protected!” message, as shown below. Because the B3:3/2 is set
(1), the B3:0/2 bit is a protected bit.
9. Try to move the cursor to the data value position by pressing the
OK key. Because the B3:0/2 bit is a protected bit, you will find
that the cursor does not move to the data value position.
10. Press the Up key once to view the data value of the B3:0/3 bit.
Because the B3:0/3 bit is not a protected bit, only its data value,
OFF (0) in this example, is displayed without the “Protected!”
message.
11. Press the Up key once to view the data value of the B3:0/4 bit.
You will find that the B3:0/3 bit is a protected bit and its data
value is ON (1).
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using the LCD
117
12. Hold down the Up key until the target bit becomes “2/15”, as
shown below.
Press the Up key again, and you will find the target bit does not
change to “3/0”. It is because the maximum range of bits you
can monitor with the LCD is the first 48 bits (3 words) of the
specified target bit file.
IMPORTANT
The maximum range of bits you can monitor with
the Bit File Monitoring functionality on the LCD is
the first 48 bits (3 words).
13. Try to press the Up and Down keys to change the target bit to
another bit. Try to change its data value using the OK, Up and
Down keys.
14. If you have finished monitoring the bit file, B3, press the ESC
key to return to the Bit/Integer File Select screen, as shown in
step 2.
Monitoring Integer File
The LCD allows you to view and change the data value of an integer
file. You can access to this functionality via the Monitoring screen of
the LCD.
To monitor an integer file on the LCD, you have to specify its file
number in the Target Integer File Number (TIF) element of the LCD
Function File and download your application program to the
controller. The TIF element can only be changed by a program
download.
Target Integer File Number (TIF)
Feature
Address
Target Integer File Number LCD:0.TIF
Data Format Type
User Program
Access
Word (int)
Read Only
Control
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
118
Using the LCD
The value stored in the TIF element identifies the integer file with
which the LCD will interface. The LCD can read or write to any valid
integer file within the controller. Valid integer files are N3 through
N255. When the LCD reads a valid integer file number, it can access
up to the first 48 elements (words 0 to 47) of the specified file on the
LCD screen. The next 48 bits (words 48 to 50) are used to define the
read-only or read/write privileges for the first 48 elements.
The only integer file that the LCD interfaces with is the file specified in
the TIF element.
IMPORTANT
Use your programming software to ensure that the
integer file you specify in the TIF element, as well as
the appropriate number of elements, exist in the
MicroLogix 1100 user program.
The example table below shows how the LCD uses the configuration
information with integer file number 7 (LCD:0.TIF=7).
Element
Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Data Address Protection Bit Element
Number
N7:0
N7:48/0
16
N7:1
N7:48/1
17
N7:2
N7:48/2
18
N7:3
N7:48/3
19
N7:4
N7:48/4
20
N7:5
N7:48/5
21
N7:6
N7:48/6
22
N7:7
N7:48/7
23
N7:8
N7:48/8
24
N7:9
N7:48/9
25
N7:10
N7:48/10
26
N7:11
N7:48/11
27
N7:12
N7:48/12
28
N7:13
N7:48/13
29
N7:14
N7:48/14
30
N7:15
N7:48/15
31
Data Address Protection Bit Element
Number
N7:16
N7:49/0
32
N7:17
N7:49/1
33
N7:18
N7:49/2
34
N7:19
N7:49/3
35
N7:20
N7:49/4
36
N7:21
N7:49/5
37
N7:22
N7:49/6
38
N7:23
N7:49/7
39
N7:24
N7:49/8
40
N7:25
N7:49/9
41
N7:26
N7:49/10
42
N7:27
N7:49/11
43
N7:28
N7:49/12
44
N7:29
N7:49/13
45
N7:30
N7:49/14
46
N7:31
N7:49/15
47
Data Address Protection Bit
N7:32
N7:33
N7:34
N7:35
N7:36
N7:37
N7:38
N7:39
N7:40
N7:41
N7:42
N7:43
N7:44
N7:45
N7:46
N7:47
N7:50/0
N7:50/1
N7:50/2
N7:50/3
N7:50/4
N7:50/5
N7:50/6
N7:50/7
N7:50/8
N7:50/9
N7:50/10
N7:50/11
N7:50/12
N7:50/13
N7:50/14
N7:50/15
The element number displayed on the LCD corresponds to the data
address as illustrated in the table. The protection bit defines whether
the data is editable or read-only. When the protection bit is set (1), the
corresponding data address is considered read-only by the LCD. The
“Protected!” message is displayed whenever a read-only element is
active on the LCD. When the protection bit is clear (0) or the
protection bit does not exist, no additional message is displayed and
the data within the corresponding address is editable from the LCD
keypad.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using the LCD
IMPORTANT
TIP
119
Although the LCD does not allow protected data to
be changed from its keypad, the control program or
other communication devices do have access to this
data. Protection bits do not provide any overwrite
protection to data within the target integer file. It is
entirely the user’s responsibility to ensure that data is
not inadvertently overwritten.
• Remaining addresses within the target file can be
used without restrictions (addresses N7:51 and
above, in this example).
• The LCD always starts at word 0 of a data file. It
cannot start at any other address within the file.
Monitoring an Integer File
For explanations in this section, we assume the followings in the
application program:
• An integer file N7, which is 53 elements long (53 words), is
defined with the preset data, as shown in the screen capture
below.
data words (first 48 words), which
are monitored on the LCD
and maskable by protection bits
protection bits (second 48 bits = 3 words)
data words (after the first 51 words), which
are not monitored on the LCD and not
maskable by protection bits
• The TIF element of the LCD Function File is set to 7 to specify
the integer file N7 as the target integer file to monitor on the
LCD, as shown in the screen capture below.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
120
Using the LCD
• The controller mode is set to REMOTE RUN.
Follow these steps to view and change the data values of the integer
file N7.
1. On the Main Menu screen, select Monitoring by using the Up
and Down keys on the LCD keypad.
2. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The Bit/Integer File
Select screen is displayed, as shown below.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using the LCD
121
3. If Integer is selected, as shown in step 2, press the OK key.
If not selected, press the Down key to select it and then press
the OK key.
4. The current data value (ON) of the N7:0 word is displayed, as
shown below. Note that the target word “0”, which is right to
“N7:”, is flashing, which means the cursor is at the target word
position.
5. We will change the data value of the N7:0 word to the negative
decimal value -1300. First, press OK to move the cursor to the
data value position. Then, the last digit of “+00000” will be
flashing, which means the cursor is at the data value position.
6. Press the Left key twice. Then, the cursor will position at the
third digit. Press the Up key three times to change the third digit
to 3.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
122
Using the LCD
7. Press the Left key once. Then, press the Up key once. The
second digit will change to “1”. Note that “1” is still flashing,
which means the cursor is still at the data value position.
8. Press the Left key once. Then, press the Down key once. The
sign digit will change to “-”, as shown below. Note that “-” is still
flashing, which means the cursor is still at the data value
position.
9. Press OK to apply the changes. Then, the new value -1300 is
applied. Note that the target word “0”, which is right to “N7:”, is
flashing. The cursor is moved automatically to the target word
position.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using the LCD
123
You can identify this change of data value is reflected to your
RSLogix 500 programming software, as shown below.
TIP
After changing the data value of a target word, press
the OK key to apply the changes or press the ESC
key to discard the changes.
10. Now, we will view the data value of a protected word N7:1.
Press the Up key once. Then, the target word will change to “1”
and its data value is displayed with the “Protected!” message, as
shown below. Because the N7:48/1 bit is set (1), the N7:1 word
is a protected word.
11. Try to move the cursor to the data value position by pressing the
OK key. Because the N7:1 word is protected, you will find that
the cursor even does not move to the data value position.
12. Press the Up key once to view the data value of the N7:2 word.
Because the N7:2 word is not protected, only its data value, 0 in
this example, is displayed without the “Protected!” message.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
124
Using the LCD
13. Hold down the Up key until the target word becomes “47”, as
shown below.
Press the Up key again, and you will find the target word does
not change to “48”. It is because the maximum range of words
you can monitor with the LCD is the first 48 words of the
specified target integer file.
IMPORTANT
The maximum range of words you can monitor with
the Integer File Monitoring functionality on the LCD
is the first 48 words (0 through 47) of the target
integer file.
14. Try to press the Up and Down keys to change the target word to
another word. Try to change its data value using the OK, Up,
Down, Right and Left keys.
15. If you have finished monitoring the integer file N7, press the
ESC key to return to the Main Menu screen, as shown in step 2.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using the LCD
Using the Mode Switch
125
The MicroLogix 1100 provides the controller mode switch on the LCD.
The possible positions of the mode switch are PROGRAM, REMOTE,
and RUN. You can change mode switch position using the Mode
Switch screen on the LCD, as shown below. In this example, the
mode switch position is set to REMOTE.
All the built-in LCD screens except the Boot Message screen display
the current mode switch position, at their top right portion, as shown
below. In this example, the mode switch position is set to RUN.
Current Mode Switch Position
Controller Modes
The table below shows the possible controller modes when the mode
switch positions at PROGRAM, REMOTE, or RUN. For example, if the
Mode Switch is at RUN and you want to test a control program with
running it for a single scan, you have to first change mode switch
position to REMOTE before you run the control program in the
remote test single scan mode with your RSLogix 500 programming
software.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
126
Using the LCD
Possible Controller Modes by Mode Switch Position
When the Mode Switch
Positions at
Possible Controller Modes are
PROGRAM
download in progress
program mode
suspend mode
(operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction)
REMOTE
remote download in progress
remote program mode
remote suspend mode
(operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction)
remote run mode
remote test continuous mode
remote test single scan mode
RUN
run mode
Changing Mode Switch Position
Mode Switch position can be changed at two different times using
LCD keypad. One is when the controller is powered up, and the other
is while the controller is powered on.
Mode Switch position can be set to either PROG or RUN when the
controller is powered up. This allows the controller operation which
is different from the previous mode, that is, any program under RUN
before can be stopped or any new program can be run when the
controller is powered up.
• How to forcibly set Mode Switch to RUN when the controller is
powered up
Press OK key for 5 seconds when the controller is powered up.
The following LCD screen appears if it’s successfully done.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using the LCD
127
• How to forcibly set Mode Switch to PROG when the controller is
powered up
Press ESC key for 5 seconds when the controller is powered up.
The following LCD screen appears if it’s successfully done.
Note that I/O output status may be changed for some programs.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
128
Using the LCD
While the controller is powered on, follow these steps to change the
position of the Mode Switch.
1. On the Main Menu screen, select Mode Switch by using the Up
and Down keys on the LCD keypad.
2. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The Mode Switch
screen is displayed, as shown below.
The arrow indicates current Mode Switch position.
3. When the Up or Down key is pressed, the mode indicated by
the arrow starts to blink if the mode is different from the current
mode of controller. Press OK key to set the controller to the
mode indicated by the arrow.
4. If you have finished changing mode switch position, press the
ESC key to return to the Main Menu screen, as shown in step 1.
Using a User Defined LCD
Screen
The MicroLogix 1100 controller allows you to use user defined LCD
screens instead of the default built-in screens.
To use a user defined screen, you need to create a group of
appropriate instructions using the LCD instruction in your application
program. For more information on how to create a user defined LCD
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using the LCD
129
screen, refer to the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers
Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001.
By using the User Displ menu item, you can change from the default
built-in screens to a user defined screen and back on the LCD.
User Defined LCD Screen
Follow these steps to display the user defined screen implemented in
your application program.
1. On the Main Menu screen, select User Displ by using the Up and
Down keys on the LCD keypad, as shown below. If the menu
items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main
Menu screen, you need to scroll down the screen by pressing
the Down key.
2. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad.
CO
M
CO M0
M
M
DC 1
OM
BA M
T.
U- LO
M
SG
If no user defined screen is used in your application program,
the screen is displayed, as shown below.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
130
Using the LCD
Note that the U-MSG indicator on the top of the LCD is
displayed in solid rectangle. It means the LCD is in User Defined
LCD mode.
CO
M
CO M0
M
M
DC 1
OM
BA M
T.
U- LO
M
SG
If a user defined screen is used in your application program, the
LCD screen is displayed, as shown below, according to the
specific instructions used in your program.
3. Hold down the ESC key more than 3 seconds to return to the
Main Menu screen, as shown below.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using the LCD
Configuring Advanced
Settings
131
With the Advanced Settings menu, which is a sub-menu under the
main menu of the LCD, you can use the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
changing Key In mode
using communications toggle functionality
viewing Ethernet port configuration
using trim pots
viewing system information
viewing fault code
You can access to the Advanced Settings Menu screen, as shown
below, by selecting Advance Set on the Main Menu screen.
Changing Key In Mode
Key In Modes
There are two Key In modes, Continuous and Discrete.
TIP
The Key In mode has effect only when you change
the data value of a trim pot on a Trim Pot screen,
either Trim Pot 0 or Trim Pot 1 screen. For more
information on how to change the data value of a
trim pot, see Changing Data Value of a Trim Pot on
page 5-136.
The current Key In mode determines how the value changes are
applied when you press the Up and Down keys to change the data
value for a trim pot. When set to Continuous, the changes are applied
immediately whenever you press the Up and Down keys. When set to
Discrete, the changes are applied only when you press the OK key
after you have changed the value using the Up and Down keys.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
132
Using the LCD
By using the Key In Mode screen, as shown below, you can change
the Key In mode to use.
Changing Key In Mode
Follow these steps to change the current Key In mode.
1. On the Main Menu screen, select Advance Set by using the Up
and Down keys on the LCD keypad, as shown below. If the
menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the
Main Menu screen, you need to scroll down the screen by
pressing the Down key.
2. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The Advanced
Settings Menu screen is displayed, as shown below.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using the LCD
133
3. Select KeyIn Mode using the Up and Down keys, and then press
the OK key.
4. The Key In Mode screen is displayed, as shown below. The
current mode, Continuous in this example, is selected marked
up with the symbol “ ”.
5. Press the Up or Down key to select the different mode, Discrete
in this example, as shown below. Then, press the OK key.
6. The Key In Mode Change Notification screen is displayed, as
shown below.
7. Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Settings Menu
screen, as shown in step 2.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
134
Using the LCD
Using Communications
Toggle Functionality
The MicroLogix 1100 provides the Communications Toggle
Functionality, which allows you to change from the user-defined
communication configuration to the default communications mode
and back to the user defined communication configuration on
Channel 0.
See Using the Communications Toggle Functionality on page 4-72 for
information about how to use the Communications Toggle
Functionality.
Viewing Ethernet Port
Configuration
The Ethernet Pot Configuration screen of the LCD displays the MAC
and IP addresses assigned to the controller.
Follow these steps to view the Ethernet port configuration for your
controller.
1. On the Main Menu screen, select Advance Set by using the Up
and Down keys on the LCD keypad, as shown below. If the
menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the
Main Menu screen, you need to scroll down the screen by
pressing the Down key.
2. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The Advanced
Settings Menu screen is displayed, as shown below.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using the LCD
135
3. If ENET Cfg is selected, press the OK key.
If not, select ENET Cfg using the Up and Down keys, and then
press the OK key.
4. The Ethernet Port Configuration screen is displayed.
When an IP address is not yet assigned to your controller, only
the MAC address assigned to your controller, which is
represented as XXXXXXXXXXXX below, is displayed.
A MAC address is a 12-digit hexadecimal number. Your
controller ships with a unique MAC address assigned in factory.
You can identify the MAC address of your controller by opening
the expansion module cover on your controller.
When an IP address is assigned to your controller, both of MAC
address and IP address of your controller are displayed, as
shown below. In this example, the MAC address is represented
as XXXXXXXXXXXX, which is a 12-digit hexadecimal number.
The IP address is represented as xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where each
xxx is a deimal number between 0-255.
5. Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Settings Menu
screen, as shown in step 2.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
136
Using the LCD
Using Trim Pots
Trim Pot Operation
The MicroLogix 1100 controller provides two trimming potentiometers
(trim pots, POT0 and POT1) which allow modification of integer data
within the controller. The data value of each trim pot can be used
throughout the control program for timers, counters, analog presets,
etc. depending upon the requirements of the application.
You can change the data value of each trim pot using the trim pot
screens provided by the LCD. To access to the Trim Pot Set screen,
which is the top screen for the trim pot functionality, select TrimPot
Set on the LCD default menu screen, as shown below, and press the
OK key on the LCD keypad.
Trim pot data is updated continuously whenever the controller is
powered-up.
Changing Data Value of a Trim Pot
Follow these steps to change the data value of a trim pot, either POT0
or POT1.
1. On the Main Menu screen, select TrimPot Set by using the Up
and Down keys on the LCD keypad.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using the LCD
137
2. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The Trim Pot Select
screen is displayed, as shown below.
The last trim pot whose data value you changed is selected by
default. If you are accessing to this screen for the first time,
POT0 is selected by default.
3. Select a trim pot, either POT0 or POT1, whose data value you
want to change using the Up and Down keys on the LCD
keypad. In this example, we will select POT0.
4. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The Trim Pot 0
screen is displayed, as shown below.
TMIN and TMAX indicate the range of data value for the trim
pots, both POT0 and POT1. The factory default for TMIN,
TMAX, and POT0 values are 0, 250, and 0 in decimal,
respectively. TMIN and TMAX on this screen are read only, but
you can change them using the LCD Function File in your
application program. The TMIN and TMAX elements can only be
changed by a program download.
For more information on how to change Trim Pot configuration
including TMIN and TMAX, refer to the LCD Function File
described in the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers
Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
138
Using the LCD
IMPORTANT
The same TMIN and TMAX values are used for both
trim pots, POT0 and POT1. This behavior is intended
by design for simplicity in Trim Pot configuration.
When you enter this screen, the last digit of the POT0 value is
flashing. It indicates the current digit. Press the Up and Down
keys on the LCD keypad to change the value of the current digit.
Press the Left and Right keys to select a different digit as the
current digit.
If the Key In mode is set to Continuous, the changes are applied
immediately after you press the Up and Down keys. While, if it
is set to Discrete, you have to press the OK key to apply the
changes after you change the data value. For more information
on how to set the Key In mode, see Changing Key In Mode on
page 5-131.
TIP
The Key In mode has effect only when you change
the data value of a trim pot on a Trim Pot screen,
either the Trim Pot 0 or Trim Pot 1 screen.
5. If you have finished changing the data value of the selected trim
pot, POT0 in this example, press the ESC key to return to the
Trim Pot Select screen, as shown in step 2.
Trim Pot Configuration in LCD Function File
The configuration for Trim Pots in the LCD Function File, including
trim pot low and high values for data value range, is described in the
MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference
Manual, publication 1763-RM001.
Error Conditions
Error conditions regarding the Trim Pot functionality are described in
the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set
Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using the LCD
Viewing System
Information
139
The System Information screen of the LCD allows you to identify the
system information for your controller.
Follow these steps to view the system information for your controller.
1. On the Main Menu screen, select Advance Set by using the Up
and Down keys on the LCD keypad, as shown below. If the
menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the
Main Menu screen, you need to scroll down the screen by
pressing the Down key.
2. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The Advanced
Settings Menu screen is displayed, as shown below.
3. If System Info is selected, press the OK key.
If not, select System Info using the Up and Down keys, and then
press the OK key.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
140
Using the LCD
4. The System Information screen is displayed.
You can identify the catalog number, operating system firmware
revision number, and boot firmware revision number of your
controller.
5. Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Settings Menu
screen, as shown in step 3.
Viewing Fault Code
The Fault Code screen of the LCD displays the fault code when a fault
occurs.
When a fault occurs, the Fault Code screen is not displayed
automatically. Only the FAULT LED on the controller flashes in red
light. Therefore, you need to navigate into the Fault Code screen to
identify the fault code on the LCD.
Follow these steps to view the fault code when a fault occurs.
1. On the Main Menu screen, select Advance Set by using the Up
and Down keys on the LCD keypad, as shown below. If the
menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the
Main Menu screen, you need to scroll down the screen by
pressing the Down key.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using the LCD
141
2. Then, press the OK key on the LCD keypad. The Advanced
Settings Menu screen is displayed, as shown below.
3. If Fault Code is selected, press the OK key.
If not, select Fault Code using the Up and Down keys, and then
press the OK key.
4. The Fault Code screen is displayed.
If no fault occurred, “0000h” is displayed, as shown below.
If a fault is occurred, its fault code is displayed, as shown below.
TIP
For more information on a specific fault code, refer
to the Online Help of your RSLogix 500 programming
software.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
142
Using the LCD
5. Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Settings Menu
screen, as shown in step 2.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Chapter
6
Using Real-Time Clock and Memory Modules
The MicroLogix 1100 controller has a built-in real-time clock (RTC).
You can order a memory module as an accessory.
TIP
For more information on “Real-Time Clock Function
File” and “Memory Module Information File”, refer to
the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers
Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication
1763-RM001.
One type of memory module is available for use with the MicroLogix
1100 controller.
Catalog Number
Function
Memory Size
1763-MM1
Memory Module
128 KB
Real-Time Clock Operation Operation at Power-up and Entering a Run or
Test Mode
At power-up and when the controller enters a run or test mode, the
values (date, time and status) of the RTC are written to the RTC
Function File in the controller.
The following table indicates the accuracy of the RTC for various
temperatures.
RTC Accuracy
Ambient Temperature
Accuracy(1)
0 °C (32 °F)
-13...-121 seconds/month
25 °C (77 °F)
54...-5 seconds/month
40 °C (104 °F)
29...-78 seconds/month
55 °C (131 °F)
-43...-150 seconds/month
(1)
143
These numbers are maximum worst case values over a 31-day month.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
144
Using Real-Time Clock and Memory Modules
Writing Data to the Real-Time Clock
When valid data is sent to the real-time clock from the programming
device or another controller, the new values take effect immediately.
The real-time clock does not allow you to load or store invalid date or
time data.
RTC Battery Operation
The real-time clock uses the same replaceable battery that the
controller uses. The RTC Function File features a battery low indicator
bit (RTC:0/BL), which shows the status of the replacement battery.
When the battery is low, the indicator bit is set (1). This means that
the battery wire connector could be disconnected or if the battery is
connected, the battery may be ready to fail in the next two weeks. In
the latter case, the replacement battery needs to be replaced with a
new one. When the battery low indicator bit is clear (0), the battery
level is acceptable.
CO
M
CO M0
M
M
DC 1
OM
BA M
T.L
U- O
M
SG
The Battery Low (BAT.LO) indicator on the LCD display of the
controller also shows the status of the replaceable battery. When the
battery is low, the indicator is displayed as solid rectangle ( ). When
the battery level is acceptable, the indicator is displayed as emty
rectangle ( ), as shown below.
If the RTC battery is low and the controller is powered, the RTC
operates normally. If the controller power is removed and the RTC
battery is low, RTC data is lost.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using Real-Time Clock and Memory Modules
ATTENTION
Memory Module Operation
145
Operating with a low battery indication for more
than 2 weeks (8 hours without a battery) may result
in invalid RTC data unless power is on continuously.
The memory module supports the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
User Program, User Data and Recipe Back-up
User Program Compare
Data File Download Protection
Memory Module Write Protection
Removal/Insertion Under Power
ATTENTION
Electrostatic discharge can damage the Memory
Module. Do not touch the connector pins or other
sensitive areas.
User Program , User Data and Recipe Back-up
The memory module provides a simple and flexible program, data
and recipe transport mechanism, allowing the user to transfer the
program, data and recipe to the controller without the use of a
personal computer and programming software.
The memory module can store one user program at a time.
During program transfers to or from the memory module, the
controller’s RUN LED flashes.
Program Compare
The memory module can also provide application security, allowing
you to specify that if the program stored in the memory module does
not match the program in the controller, the controller will not enter
an executing (run or test) mode. To enable this feature, set the S:2/9
bit in the system status file. See “Status System File” in the MicroLogix
1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual,
Publication 1763-RM001 for more information.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
146
Using Real-Time Clock and Memory Modules
Data File Download Protection
The memory module supports data file download protection. This
allows user data to be saved (not overwritten) during a download.
TIP
Data file download protection is only functional if the
processor does not have a fault, size of all protected
data files in the memory module exactly match the
size of protected data files within the controller, and
all protected data files are of the same type. See
“Protecting Data Files During Download” in the
MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers
Instruction Set Reference Manual, Publication
1763-RM001.
Memory Module Write Protection
The memory module supports write-once, read-many behavior. Write
protection is enabled using your programming software.
IMPORTANT
Once set, write protection cannot be removed. A
change cannot be made to the control program
stored in a write protected memory module. If a
change is required, use a different memory module.
Removal/Insertion Under Power
The memory module can be installed or removed at any time without
risk of damage to either the memory module or the controller. If a
memory module is installed while the MicroLogix 1100 is executing,
the memory module is not recognized until either a power cycle
occurs, or until the controller is placed in a non-executing mode
(program mode, suspend mode or fault condition).
Memory Module Information File
The controller has a Memory Module Information (MMI) File which
provides status from the attached memory module. At power-up or on
detection of a memory module being inserted, the catalog number,
series, revision, and type are identified and written to the MMI file. If a
memory module is not attached, zeros are written to the MMI file.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using Real-Time Clock and Memory Modules
147
Refer to the MicroLogix 1100 Instruction Set Reference Manual,
publication 1763-RM001, for more information.
Program /Data Download
To download the program and data from a memory module to the
controller’s memory, on the “Comms” menu in your RSLogix 500
programming software, point “EEPROM” and then click “Load from
EEPROM”.
TIP
For more information on program/data download,
refere to your RSLogix 500 programming software
documentation.
Program /Data Upload
To upload the program and data from the controller’s memory to a
memory module, on the “Comms” menu in your RSLogix 500
programming software, point “EEPROM” and then click “Store to
EEPROM”.
TIP
For more information on program/data upload, refer
to your RSLogix 500 programming software
documentation.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
148
Using Real-Time Clock and Memory Modules
Notes:
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Chapter
7
Online Editing
The online editing function lets you monitor and modify your ladder
program when your programming terminal is connected to a
MicroLogix 1100 processor.
Overview of Online Editing
Online editing of ladder programs is available when using MicroLogix
1100 processors. Use this function to make changes to a pre-existing
ladder program. Online editing functions consist of inserting,
replacing, and deleting rungs in an existing ladder program while
online with the processor.
Only one programming device can perform an online edit of a user
program at a time. When an online editing session begins, an access
from other programming devices will be rejected by MicroLogix 1100.
ATTENTION
Before initiating an online editing session, we recommend that you fully understand the possible results of
the edit to the system under control. Failure to properly
edit a running program could result in unexpected controller operation. Physical injury or equipment damage
may result.
While three instructions, MSG, PTO, and PWM, are
supported by program mode online edit, they are not
supported by RUNTIME (RUN mode) online edit. Refer
to the MicroLogix™ 1100 Instruction Set Reference
Manual, publication 1763-RM001 for additional details.
149
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
150
Online Editing
The following table summarizes the differences between offline and
online editing.
Offline
Online
Data table file resizing is not permitted.
No restrictions exist.
Full editing
capabilities are
allowed.
Program file creation and deletion are not permitted.
Alteration of file protection is not permitted.
Alteration of static and constant data file values is not permitted.
Indexing across file boundary selections is not permitted.
Force protection selection is not permitted.
I/O configuration is not permitted.
IMPORTANT
It is important to keep in mind that some ladder
instructions, when programmed online, cause data
table values to change. These instructions are those
that require timer, counter, and control addresses
to be specified. This is discussed later in the
chapter.
Online Editing Terms
The following terms are used throughout this chapter.
• Assemble Edits — Deletes any rungs marked with Delete or
Replace edit zone markers during an online editing session.
Inserted or modified rungs remain. All edit zone markers are
removed when this function is complete.
• Cancel Edits — Deletes any inserted or modified rungs added
during an online editing session. Rungs marked with Delete and
Replace edit zone markers remain. All edit zone markers are
removed when this function is complete.
• Test Edits — Allows you to verify that the changes you entered
are not going to cause improper machine operation before you
make the changes a permanent part of your ladder program.
• Untest Edits — Allows you to disable testing.
• Edit Zone markers — Appear on the power rail of the ladder
program display. They indicate the type of edit taking place on
the rung.
• Accept Rung — Incorporates the edits of a single rung into the
ladder program.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Online Editing
151
• online edit session — begins when a user tries to edit rungs
while online. Any other programming device that was
monitoring the user program is removed from the program
monitor display.
• modify rung — when an existing rung is modified two edit
zones are created. The original rung is indicated by replace zone
markers on the power rail. A copy of the original rung is made
so you can insert, delete, or modify instructions. This rung is
indicated by insert zone markers on the power rail. Thus, an IR
pair is created when you modify a rung.
• runtime online editing — the user program is executing when
an edit takes place. Any rungs that are inserted, modified, or
deleted remain in the ladder program and are indicated by edit
zone markers on the power rail. Edit zone markers remain after
an action is completed.
• program online editing — the user program is not executing
when an edit session begins. Any action that inserts, deletes, or
modifies a rung takes place immediately.
The following figure shows the process involved when performing a
runtime online edit.
Begin Edit Session
Online Edit
Cancel Edits
Remove Edits
End Edit Session
Untest Edits
Edits do not work
Assemble Edits
Edits complete
Test Edits
Edits work
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
152
Online Editing
Effects of Online Editing On
Your System
The following section covers the effects of online editing on your
system. Keep these items in mind while using the online editing
function.
System Impacts
The scan time and interrupt latency can be extended when accepting
a rung, assembling, or canceling edits.
Memory limitations - Online edit can be performed until there is
insufficient program memory available in the processor. Note that,
before assemble edits, all the edited rungs are in the processor
memory consuming memory, although they are not executed.
Data Table File Size
Online editing cannot change the size of existing data tables nor can
new ones be created. However, some ladder instructions, when
programmed cause data table values to change. These instructions are
those that require timer, counter, and control addresses to be
specified.
Online Edit Error
If either electrical interference, communication loss, or a power cycle
occur during online edit session, program integrity may be impacted.
In this case, the controller will generate the 1F fault code, clear the
user program, and load the default program.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Online Editing
153
Directions and Cautions for Change the RSLinx "Configure CIP Option"
(OS Series A FRN 1,2, and 3 only)
MicroLogix 1100 Online
Edit User
Change the RSLinx "Configure CIP Option" to prevent ownership fault
when MicroLogix 1100 is connected using RSLinx classic Ethernet/IP
driver.
Several RSLogix 500 Online operations require obtaining the processor
Edit Resource/Processor Ownership in order to ensure that one
programming terminal has exclusive capability of performing any of
these operations at a time. These operations include downloading,
online editing, and applying channel configuration changes.
In addition to reducing the number of RSLinx Messaging Connections
per PLC to one, it is also recommended that the Messaging
Connection Retry Interval be increased from the default of 1.25
seconds to 8 seconds as shown in the following figure.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
154
Online Editing
A Download Before Starting Online Edit
At least one download is required before starting online edit.
If you are using a MicroLogix 1100 from out-of-box state or after clear
processor memory or firmware upgrade, at least one download is
required before starting online edits. If not, the following error occurs
and programming software will go offline due to default image
mismatch between programming software (RSLogix500) and the
MicroLogix 1100. You can also see the fault code 1Fh which is a user
defined fault code.
In order to prevent this error, a user needs to download the program
to the MicroLogix 1100, although the program is empty.
This problem happens only in out-of-box state or after clear processor
memory.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Online Editing
ATTENTION
155
PTO and PWM instructions may not be deleted
during runtime online edit. This is because if the
PTO or PWM instructions were deleted during
runtime online edit, outputs could stop in an
unpredictable state, causing unexpected equipment
operation.
If you attempt to insert or modify a rung with MSG,
PTO, and PWM instruction, the following error
message will be generated by programming software
"Error: Online editing of PTO, PWM and MSG are not
allowed on ML1100 RUN mode." And, the rung with
MSG, PTO, and PWM instruction will not be
accepted.
In online edit during PROGRAM mode (program online edit), there
are no restrictions. For example, a user can insert MSG instruction if
related MG file or MG/RI file is already defined in data file.
ATTENTION
When editing a rung that contains an MCR
instruction, both the MCR start and MCR end rungs
must be edited (whether it be test/assemble/cancel)
at the same time. We recommend that you fully
understand the possible results of the edit to the
system under control. Failure to properly edit a
running program could result in unexpected
controller operation. Physical injury or equipment
damage may result.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
156
Online Editing
ATTENTION
Types of Online Editing
If you use EII or STI interrupts and your application
requires a quick interrupt latency, the online edit
feature is not recommended. Online editing feature
may increase the interrupt latency response time. To
ensure minimum interrupt latency, place the mode
switch in LCD screen in the RUN mode. This
prevents the use of the online editing feature.
The type of online editing is dependent on the MicroLogix 1100
processor’s mode switch position in LCD display and the processor’s
mode. There are two types of online editing:
• Program Online Editing — when the processor is in either
PROG mode or REM Program mode
• Runtime Online Editing — when the processor is in either REM
Test or REM Run mode
The following table summarizes the MicroLogix 1100 processor mode
switch positions in LCD and modes that enable online editing.
mode switch Position
MicroLogix 1100
Processor Mode
Editing Mode
RUN
RUN
Not Available
PROGram
Program
Program Online Editing
REMote
REMote Program
Program Online Editing
REMote
REMote Test
Program Online Editing
REMote
REMote Run
Program Online Editing
IMPORTANT Online editing is not available when the mode switch
in LCD screen is in the RUN position.
ATTENTION
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Use the online editing function while in the RUN
mode to make minor changes to the ladder program.
We recommend developing your program offline
since ladder rung logic changes take effect
immediately after testing your edits. Improper
machine operation may occur, causing personnel
injury or equipment damage.
Online Editing
157
Edit Functions in Runtime Online Editing
During a runtime online editing session, the processor is executing
ladder logic. The edit zone markers tell the processor that changes
exist, but the changes are not executed until you test the edits.
Deleted and replaced (modified) rungs are not removed from the
program and inserted rungs are not executed until you assemble the
edits.
Edit Functions in Program Online Editing
During a program online editing session, the processor is not
executing ladder logic. This mode is like the offline editing mode.
Note that if a runtime online editing session was performed prior to
entering the offline editing mode, edit marked rungs (I, IR, and D)
appear in the program.
If you perform a program online edit, once you accept or delete the
rung, the edits take effect immediately and the power rail is displayed
as a solid line. If you edit a rung with edit zone markers, the markers
are removed when the rung is accepted.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
158
Online Editing
Notes:
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Appendix
A
Specifications
General Specifications
Description
1763L16AWA
L16BWA
L16BBB
L16DWD
Dimensions
Height: 90 mm (3.5 in.), 104 mm (4.09 in.) (with DIN latch open)
Width: 110 mm (4.33 in.), Depth: 87 mm (3.43 in.)
Shipping Weight
0.9 kg (2.0 lbs)
Number of I/O
12 inputs (10 digital and 2 analog) and 6 outputs
Power Supply Voltage
100...240V ac ( -15%, +10%)
at 47...63 Hz
Heat Dissipation
See Appendix G.
Power Supply Inrush
Current (max.)
120V ac: 25A for 8 ms
240V ac: 40A for 4 ms
Maximum Power
Consumption
46 VA
52 VA
35 W
See Figure on 160.
24V dc Sensor Power
none
250 mA at 24V dc
AC Ripple < 500 mV
peak-to-peak
400 µF max.
none
Input Circuit Type
Digital: 120V ac
Digital: 24V dc
sink/source
(standard and high-speed)
Digital: 24V dc
sink/source
(standard and high-speed)
Analog: 0...10V dc
Analog: 0...10V dc
Analog: 0...10V dc
Output Circuit Type
Relay
Relay
Relay/FET
Operating Temperture
-20 °C...65 °C (-4 °F...149 F) ambient
Storage Temperature
-40 °C...85 °C (-40 °F...185 °F) ambient
Relative Humidity
5%...95% non-condensing
Vibration
Operating: 10...500 Hz, 5 g, 0.015 in. max. peak-to-peak, 2 hours each axis
Relay Operation: 1.5 g
Shock, Operating
30 g; 3 pulses each direction, each axis
Relay Operation: 10 g
Shock, Non-Operating
50 g panel mounted (40 g DIN Rail mounted); 3 pulses each direction, each axis
Terminal Screw Torque
0.56 Nm (5.0 in-lb) rated
Certification
UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for use in Class 1, Division 2, Hazardous Locations,
Groups A, B, C, D
24V dc ( -15%, +10%)
Class 2 SELV
12V to 24V dc ( -15%,
+10%) Class 2 SELV
24V dc: 15A for 20 ms
Relay
C-UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for use in Canada
CE marked for all applicable directives
C-Tick marked for all applicable acts
Electrical/EMC
159
The controller has passed testing at the following levels:
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
160
Specifications
General Specifications
Description
1763L16AWA
L16BWA
L16BBB
L16DWD
ESD Immunity
EN 61000-4-2
4 kV contact, 8 kV air, 4 kV indirect
Radiated RF Immunity
EN 61000-4-3
10V/m, 26...1000 MHz (alternatively, 80...1000 MHz),
80% amplitude modulation, +900 MHz keyed carrier
Fast Transient Immunity
EN 61000-4-4
2 kV, 5 kHz
communications cable such as EtherNet, RS-232, and RS-485: 1 kV, 5 kHz
Surge Transient Immunity
EN 61000-4-5
Unshielded communications cable: 2 kV CM (common mode), 1 kV DM (differential mode)
Shielded communications cable: 1 kV galvanic gun
I/O: 2 kV CM (common mode), 1 kV DM (differential mode)
AC Power Supply Input: 4 kV CM (common mode), 2 kV DM (differential mode)
DC Power Supply Input: 500V CM (common mode), 500V DM (differential mode)
AC/DC Auxiliary Output: 500V CM (common mode), 500V DM (differential mode)
Conducted RF Immunity
EN 61000-4-6
10V, 150 kHz...80 MHz
Conducted Emissions
EN 55011
AC Power Supply Input: 150 kHz...30 MHz
Radiated Emissions
EN 55011
30 MHz...1000 MHz
Line Related Tests
EN 61000-4-11
AC Power Supply Input:
voltage drop: -30% for 10 ms, -60% for 100 ms
voltage interrupt: at voltage greater than -95% for 5 sec.
voltage fluctuation: +10% for 15 minutes, -10% for 15 minutes
DC Power Supply Input:
voltage fluctuation: +20% for 15 minutes, -20% for 15 minutes
MicroLogix 1100 DC Input Power Requirements for 1763-L16BBB Unit
1763-L16BBB and 1763-L16DWD Typical Power Requirements
Input Power Required
at 24V dc (Watts)
28
21
14
7
0
4
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
8
12
Calculated Load power (Watts)
16
20
Specifications
161
Digital Input Specifications
Description
On-State Voltage Range
1763-L16AWA
79...132V ac
1763-L16BWA, -L16BBB
Inputs 0 through 3
(4 high-speed DC inputs)
Inputs 4 and higher
(6 standard DC inputs)
14...24V dc
10...24V dc
(14...26.4V dc (+10%) at 65
°C/149 °F)
(14...30V dc (+25%) at 30
°C/86 °F)
(10...26.4V dc (+10%) at 65
°C/149 °F)
(10...30V dc (+25%) at 30
°C/86 °F)
Off-State Voltage Range
0...20V ac
0...5V dc
Operating Frequency
47 Hz...63 Hz
0 Hz...20 kHz
0 Hz...1 kHz
(scan time dependent)
0 Hz...40 kHz(1)
On-State Current:
•minimum
•nominal
•maximum
•5.0 mA at 79V ac
•12 mA at 120V ac
•16.0 mA at 132V ac
•2.5 mA at 14V dc
•9,8 mA at 24V dc
•12.0 mA at 30V dc
Off-State Leakage Current
2.5 mA max.
1.5 mA max.
Nominal Impedance
12 kΩ at 50 Hz
3.1 kΩ
•2.0 mA at 10V dc
•8.5 mA at 24V dc
•12.0 mA at 30V dc
3.1 kΩ
10 kΩ at 60 Hz
Inrush Current (max.) at 120V ac
250 mA
Not Applicable
(1) OS Series B FRN 4 or later
Digital Input Specifications for 1763-L16DWD
Description
1763-L16DWD
Inputs 0 through 3
(4 high-speed DC inputs)
On-State Voltage Range
10...24V dc at 65 °C/149 °F)
(10...30V dc at 30 °C/86 °F)
Off-State Voltage Range
0...5V dc
Operating Frequency
0 Hz...40 kHz(1)
Inputs 4 and higher
(6 standard DC inputs)
0 Hz...1 kHz
On-State Current:
•minimum
•nominal
•maximum
•2.0 mA at 10V dc
•8.5 mA at 24V dc
•12.0 mA at 30V dc
Off-State Leakage Current
1.5 mA max.
Nominal Impedance
2.61 kΩ
Maximum Inrush Current
Not Applicable
3.1 kΩ
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
162
Specifications
(1) OS Series B FRN 4 or later
Analog Input Specifications
Description
1763-L16AWA, -L16BWA, -L16BBB, -L16DWD
Voltage Input Range
0...10.0V dc - 1 LSB
Type of Data
10-bit unsigned integer
Input Coding (0...10.0V dc - 1 LSB)
0...+1,023
Voltage Input Impedance
210 kΩ
Input Resolution
10 bit
Non-linearity
±1.0% of full scale
Overall Accurarcy
-20 °C...65 °C (-4 °F...149 °F)
±1.0% of full scale
Voltage Input Overvoltage Protection
10.5V dc
Field Wiring to Logic Isolation
Non-isolated with logic
Output Specifications - General
Description
1763L16AWA, L16BWA, L16DWD
L16BBB
1,440 VA
1,440 VA
5A/3A
5A/3A
Relay and FET Outputs
Maximum Controlled Load
Maximum Continuous Current:
Current per Group Common(1)
Current per Controller
at 150V max
For UL 508, 30A or total of per-point loads, whichever is less
For UL 1604, 18A or total of per-point loads, whichever is less
at 240V max
For UL 508, 20A or total of per-point loads, whichever is less
For UL 1604, 18A or total of per-point loads, whichever is less
Relay Outputs
Turn On Time/Turn Off Time
10 msec (minimum)(2)
Load Current
10 mA (minimum)
(1) 5A for UL 508
3A for UL 1604, Class 1, Division 2, Hazardous Locations, Groups A, B, C, D
(2) scan time dependent
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Specifications
163
BBB FET Output Specifications
Description
General Operation
Power Supply Voltage
24V dc ( -15%, +10%)
High Speed Operation(1)
(Output 2 and 3 Only)
On-State Voltage Drop:
•at maximum load current
•at maximum surge current
•1V dc
•2.5V dc
•Not Applicable
•Not Applicable
•See graphs below.
•1.0 mA
•1.0 mA
•100 mA
•10 mA
•1.0 mA
Current Rating per Point
•maximum load
•minimum load
•maximum leakage
Maximum Output Current (temperature dependent):
FET Current per Point
(1763-L16BBB)
FET Total Current
(1763-L16BBB)
8.0
2.0
7.0
1.75
1.5A, 30˚C (86˚F)
6.0
1.0
Valid
Range
0.75
0.5
0.75A, 65˚C (149˚F)
0.25
Current (Amps)
Current (Amps)
1.5
1.25
5.0
4.0
3.0A, 30˚C (86˚F)
3.0
2.0
Valid
Range
1.0
10˚C
(50˚F)
30˚C
(86˚F)
50˚C
(122˚F)
Temperature
70˚C
(158˚F)
80˚C
(176˚F)
10˚C
(50˚F)
30˚C
(86˚F)
1.5A, 65˚C (149˚F)
50˚C
(122˚F)
70˚C
(158˚F)
80˚C
(176˚F)
Temperature
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
164
Specifications
BBB FET Output Specifications
Description
General Operation
High Speed Operation(1)
(Output 2 and 3 Only)
•peak current
•maximum surge duration
•maximum rate of repetition at 30 °C (86 °F)
•maximum rate of repetition at 55 °C (131 °F)
•4.0A
•10 msec
•once every second
•once every 2 seconds
•Not Applicable
•Not Applicable
•Not Applicable
•Not Applicable
Turn-On Time (maximum)
0.1 msec
6 µsec
Turn-Off Time (maximum)
1.0 msec
18 µsec
Repeatability (maximum)
n/a
2 µsec
Drift (maximum)
n/a
1 µsec per 5 °C (9 °F)
Surge Current per Point:
(1) Output 2 and 3 are designed to provide increased functionality over the other FET outputs. Output 2 and 3 may be used like the other FET transistor outputs, but in addition,
within a limited current range, they may be operated at a higher speed. Output 2 and 3 also provide a pulse train output (PTO) or pulse width modulation output (PWM)
function.
AC Input Filter Settings
Nominal Filter Setting (ms)
ON Delay (ms)
8
OFF Delay (ms)
Minimum
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum
2
20
10
20
High-Speed DC Input Filter Settings (Inputs 0 to 3)
Nominal Filter Setting (ms) ON Delay (ms)
OFF Delay (ms)
Maximum Counter Frequency (Hz)
50% Duty Cycle
Minimum
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum
00125
0.005
0.0125
0.003
0.0085
40.0 kHz(2)
0.025
0.005
0.025
0.005
0.025
20.0 kHz
0.075
0.040
0.075
0.045
0.075
6.7 kHz
0.100
0.050
0.100
0.060
0.100
5.0 kHz
0.250
0.170
0.250
0.210
0.250
2.0 kHz
0.500
0.370
0.500
0.330
0.500
1.0 kHz
1.00
0.700
1.000
0.800
1.000
0.5 kHz
2.000
1.700
2.000
1.600
2.000
250 Hz
4.000
3.400
4.000
3.600
4.000
125 Hz
8.000(1)
6.700
8.000
7.300
8.000
63 Hz
16.000
14.000
16.000
14.000
16.000
31 Hz
(1) This is the default setting.
(2) OS Series B FRN4 or later
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Specifications
165
Standard DC Input Filter Settings (Inputs 4 and higher)
Nominal Filter Setting (ms) ON Delay (ms)
OFF Delay (ms)
Maximum Frequency (Hz)
50% Duty Cycle
Minimum
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum
0.500
0.090
0.500
0.020
0.500
1.0 kHz
1.000
0.500
1.000
0.400
1.000
0.5 kHz
2.000
1.100
2.000
1.300
2.000
250 Hz
4.000
2.800
4.000
2.700
4.000
125 Hz
8.000(1)
5.800
8.000
5.300
8.000
63 Hz
16.000
11.000
16.000
10.000
16.000
31 Hz
(1) This is the default setting.
Relay Contact Ratings
Maximum Volts
Amperes
Volt-Amperes
Make
Break
Amperes
Continuous(1)
Make
Break
240V ac
15.0A
1.5A
5.0A(2)/3.0A
3600 VA
360 VA
120V ac
30.0A
3.0A
5.0A(2)/3.0A
3600 VA
360 VA
125V dc
0.22A(3)
1.0A
28 VA
24V dc
1.2A(3)
2.0A
(1) 5.0 A for UL 508
3. 0A for UL 1604, Class 1, Division 2, Hazardous Locations, Groups A, B, C, D
(2) 3.0 A above 40 °C.(104 °F)
(3) For dc voltage applications, the make/break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined by dividing 28 VA by
the applied dc voltage. For example, 28 VA/48V dc = 0.58A. For dc voltage applications less than 14V, the make/break
ratings for relay contacts cannot exceed 2A.
Working Voltage (1763-L16AWA)
Description
1763-L16AWA
Power Supply Input to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1
second
265V ac Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)
Input Group to Backplane Isolation
Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:1517V ac for 1 second or 2145V dc for 1 second
Input Group to Input Group Isolation
Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:1517V ac for 1 second or 2145V dc for 1 second
132V ac Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)
132V ac Working Voltage (basic insulation)
Output Group to Backplane Isolation
Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1
second
265V ac Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)
Output Group to Output Group Isolation
Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1second
265V ac Working Voltage (basic insulation) 150V ac Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced
insulation).
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
166
Specifications
Working Voltage (1763-L16BWA)
Description
1763-L16BWA
Power Supply Input to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests:1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second
265V ac Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)
Input Group to Backplane Isolation and
Input Group to Input Group Isolation
Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1200V ac for 1 second or 1697V dc for 1 second
Output Group to Backplane Isolation
Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second
75V dc Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)
265V ac Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation).
Output Group to Output Group Isolation
Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second
265V ac Working Voltage (basic insulation) 150V Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced
insulation)
Working Voltage (1763-L16BBB)
Description
1762-L16BBB
Input Group to Backplane Isolation and Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1200V ac for 1 second or 1697V dc for 1 second
Input Group to Input Group Isolation
75V dc Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)
FET Output Group to Backplane
Isolation
Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1200V ac for 1 second or 1697V dc for 1 second
Relay Output Group to Backplane
Isolation
Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second
Relay Output Group to Relay Output
Group and FET Output Group Isolation
Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second
75V dc Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)
265V ac Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation).
265V ac Working Voltage (basic insulation) 150V Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced
insulation)
Working Voltage (1763-L16DWD)
Description
1763-L16BWA
Input Group to Backplane Isolation and
Input Group to Input Group Isolation
Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1200V ac for 1 second or 1697V dc for 1 second
Output Group to Backplane Isolation
Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second
Output Group to Output Group Isolation
Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V ac for 1 second or 2596V dc for 1 second
75V dc Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)
265V ac Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation).
265V ac Working Voltage (basic insulation) 150V Working Voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced
insulation)
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Specifications
Expansion I/O
Specifications
167
Digital I/O Modules
General Specifications
Specification
Value
Dimensions
90 mm (height) x 87 mm (depth) x 40.4 mm (width)
height including mounting tabs is 110 mm
3.54 in. (height) x 3.43 in. (depth) x 1.59 in. (width)
height including mounting tabs is 4.33 in.
Storage Temperature
-40 °C...85 °C (-40 °F...185 °F)
Operating Temperature
0 °C...55 °C (32 °F...131 °F)
Operating Humidity
5%...95% non-condensing
Operating Altitude
2000 meters (6561 feet)
Vibration
Operating: 10...500 Hz, 5 g, 0.030 in. max. peak-to-peak,
2 hours per axis
Relay Operation: 1.5 g
Shock
Operating: 30G panel mounted, 3 pulses per axis
Relay Operation: 7 g
Non-Operating: 50 g panel mounted, 3 pulses per axis
(40G DIN Rail mounted)
Agency Certification
C-UL certified (under CSA C22.2 No. 142)
UL 508 listed
CE compliant for all applicable directives
Hazardous Environment Class
Class I, Division 2, Hazardous Location, Groups A, B, C, D (UL 1604, C-UL under CSA C22.2 No. 213)
Radiated and Conducted Emissions EN50081-2 Class A
ESD Immunity (IEC1000-4-2)
4 kV contact, 8 kV air, 4 kV indirect
Radiated Immunity (IEC1000-4-3)
10 V/m, 80...1000 MHz, 80% amplitude modulation, +900 MHz keyed carrier
Fast Transient Burst (IEC1000-4-4)
2 kV, 5 kHz
Surge Immunity (IEC1000-4-5)
2 kV common mode, 1 kV differential mode
Conducted Immunity (IEC1000-4-6)
10V, 0.15...80 MHz(1)
(1) Conducted Immunity frequency range may be 150 kHz to 30 MHz if the Radiated Immunity frequency range is 30 MHz to 1000 MHz.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
168
Specifications
Input Specifications
Specification
1762-IA8
1762-IQ8
1762-IQ16
1762-IQ8OW6
Approximate Shipping
Weight
(With Carton)
209g (0.46 lbs.)
200g (0.44 lbs.)
230 g (0.51 lbs.)
280g (0.62 lbs.)
Voltage Category
100/120V ac
24V dc (sink/source)(1)
24V dc (sink/source)(1)
24V dc (sink/source)(1)
Operating Voltage
Range
79V ac...132V ac at 47
Hz...63 Hz
10...30V dc at 30 °C (86 °F) 10...30V dc at 30 °C (86
10...26.4V dc at 55 °C (131 °F)
10...26.4V dc at 55 °C (131
°F)
°F)
10...30V dc at 30 °C
(86 °F)
10...26.4V dc at 65 °C
(149 °F)
Number of Inputs
8
8
16
8
Bus Current Draw
(max.)
50 mA at 5V dc (0.25W)
50 mA at 5V dc (0.25W)
60 mA at 5V dc (0.3W)
110 mA at 5V dc
80 mA at 24V dc
Heat Dissipation (max.) 2.0 W
3.7 W
4.2 W at 26.4V
5.3 W at 30V
5.0 W at 30V dc
4.4 W at 26.4V dc
(The Watts per point,
plus the minimum W,
with all points
energized.)
Signal Delay (max.)
On Delay: 20.0 ms
On Delay: 8.0 ms
On Delay: 8.0 ms
On-delay: 8.0 ms
Off Delay: 20.0 ms
Off Delay: 8.0 ms
Off Delay: 8.0 ms
Off-delay: 8.0 ms
Off-State Voltage
(max.)
20V ac
5V dc
5V dc
5V dc
Off-State Current
(max.)
2.5 mA
1.5 mA
1.5 mA
1.5 mA
On-State Voltage (min.) 79V ac (min.) 132V ac (max.) 10V dc
10V dc
10V dc
On-State Current
5.0 mA (min.) at 79V ac 47
Hz
12.0 mA (nominal) at 120V
ac 60 Hz
16.0 mA (max.) at 132V ac
63 Hz
2.0 mA min. at 10V dc
8.0 mA nominal at 24V dc
12.0 mA max. at 30V dc
10 mA at 5V dc
2.0 mA min. at 10V dc
8.0 mA nominal at 24V dc
12.0 mA max. at 30V dc
Inrush Current (max.)
250 mA
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
250 mA
Nominal Impedance
12K Ω at 50 Hz
10K Ω at 60 Hz
3K Ω
3K Ω
3K Ω
Power Supply Distance
Rating
6 (The module may not be located more than 6 modules away from the power supply.)
IEC Input Compatibility
Type 1+
Type 1+
Type 1+
Type 1+
Isolated Groups
Group 1: inputs 0 to 7
(internally connected
commons)
Group 1: inputs 0 to 7
(internally connected
commons)
Group 1: inputs 0 to 7;
Group 2: inputs 8 to 15
Group 1: inputs 0 to 3;
Group 2: inputs 4 to 7
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Specifications
169
Input Specifications
Specification
1762-IA8
1762-IQ8
1762-IQ16
1762-IQ8OW6
Input Group to
Backplane Isolation
Verified by one of the
following dielectric tests:
1,517V ac for 1 sec. or
2,145V dc for 1 sec.
Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1200V ac for 1 sec. or 1697V dc
for 1 sec.
75V dc working voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)
132V ac working voltage
(IEC Class 2 reinforced
insulation)
Vendor I.D. Code
1
Product Type Code
7
Product Code
114
96
97
98
(1) Sinking/Sourcing Inputs - Sourcing/sinking describes the current flow between the I/O module and the field device. Sourcing I/O circuits supply (source) current to sinking
field devices. Sinking I/O circuits are driven by a current sourcing field device. Field devices connected to the negative side (DC Common) of the field power supply are
sinking field devices. Field devices connected to the positive side (+V) of the field supply are sourcing field devices.
Output Specifications
Spec.
1762-OB8
1762-OB16
1762-OW8
Approximate 215g (0.48 lbs.)
Shipping
Weight
(With Carton)
210g (0.46
lbs.)
235g (0.52
lbs.)
228g (0.50 lbs.) 285g (0.63 lbs.)
Voltage
Category
100...240V ac
24V dc
24V dc
AC/DC
normally open
relay
Operating
Voltage
Range
85V...265V ac
at 47...63 Hz
20.4V...26.4V
dc
Number of
Outputs
8
Bus Current
Draw (max.)
115 mA at 5V
dc
(0.575W)
Heat
Dissipation
(max.)
1762-OA8
2.9 W
1762-OW16
1762-OX6I
1762-IQ8OW6
220g (0.485 lbs) 280g (0.62 lbs.)
AC/DC normally AC/DC Type C
open relay
Relay
AC/DC normally
open relay
20.4V ...26.4V 5...265V ac
dc
5...125V dc
5...265V ac
5...125V dc
5...265V ac
5...125V dc
5...265V ac
5...125V dc
8
16
8
16
6
6
115 mA at 5V
dc (0.575W)
175 mA at 5V
dc (0.88W)
80 mA at 5V dc
(0.40W)
90 mA at 24V
dc (2.16W)
120 mA at 5V dc 110 mA at 5V dc 110 mA at 5V dc
(0.55W)
(0.60W)
80 mA at 24V dc
140 mA at 24V 110 mA at 24V
dc (2.64W)
dc (3.36W)
2.9 W
5.6 W
1.61 W
2.9 W at 30
°C (86 °F)
2.1 W at 55
°C (131 °F)
2.8 W
5.0 W at 30V dc
4.4 W at 26.4V
dc (The Watts
per point, plus
the minimum
W, with all
points
energized.)
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
170
Specifications
Output Specifications
Spec.
1762-OA8
Signal Delay On Delay: 1/2
cycle
(max.) –
resistive load
Off Delay: 1/2
cycle
Off-State
Leakage
(max.)
2 mA at 132V,
2.5 mA at 265V
On-State
10 mA
Current (min.)
1762-OB8
1762-OB16
1762-OW8
1762-OW16
1762-OX6I
1762-IQ8OW6
On Delay: 0.1
ms
On Delay: 0.1
ms
On Delay: 10
ms
Off Delay:
1.0ms
Off Delay: 1.0
ms
Off Delay: 10
ms
On Delay: 10 ms On Delay: 10 ms
(max) 6 ms
(typical)
Off Delay: 10
ms
Off Delay: 20
ms (max)
12 ms (typical)
On-delay: 10 ms
(max)
Off-delay: 10
ms (max)
1.0 mA
1.0 mA
0 mA
0 mA
0 mA
0 mA
1.0 mA
1.0 mA
10 mA
10 mA
100 mA
10 mA
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
On-State
Voltage Drop
(maximum)
1.5V at 0.5 A
1.0V dc
1.0V dc
Not Applicable
Continuous
Current per
Point (max.)
0.25A at 55 °C
(131 °F)
0.5A at 30 °C
(86 °F)
0.5A at 55 °C
(131 °F)
1.0A at 30 °C
(86 °F)
0.5A at 55 °C
(131 °F)
1.0A at 30 °C
(86 °F)
2.5A (Also see “Relay Contact
Ratings” on 171.)
7A (Also see
“Relay Contact
Ratings” on
172.)
2.5A (Also see
“Relay Contact
Ratings” on
171.)
Continuous
Current per
Common
(max.)
1.0 A at 55 °C
(131 °F)
2.0 A at 30 °C
(86 °F)
4.0A at 55 °C
(131 °F)
8.0A at 30 °C
(86 °F)
4.0A at 55 °C
(131 °F)
8.0A at 30 °C
(86 °F)
8A
8A
7A (Also see
“Relay Contact
Ratings” on
165.)
8A
Continuous
Current per
Module
(max.)
2.0 A at 55 °C
(131 °F)
4.0 A at 30 °C
(86 °F)
4.0A at 55 °C
4.0 A at 55
°C;
(131 °F)
8.0 A at 30 °C
8.0A at 30 °C
(86 °F)
16 A
16A
30A (Also see
Module Load
Ratings
1762-OX6I on
page 173
8A
See “Relay
Contact
Ratings” on
172.)
See “Relay
Contact
Ratings” on
171.)
All 6 Outputs
Individually
Isolated.
Group 3:
Outputs 0 to 5
Surge Current 5.0 A
(maximum)
(Repeatability is
once every 2
seconds for a
duration of 25
msec.
2.0A
(Repeatability
is once every
2 seconds at
55 °C (131
°F), once
every second
at 30 °C (86
°F) for a
duration of 10
msec.)
See “Relay Contact Ratings” on
2.0A
(Repeatability 171.)
is once every
2 seconds at
55 °C (131
°F), once
every second
at 30 °C (86
°F) for a
duration of 10
msec.)
Power Supply 6 (The module may not be more than 6 modules away from the power supply.)
Distance
Rating
Isolated
Groups
Group 1:
Outputs 0 to 3
Group 1:
Outputs 0 to
7
Group 2:
Outputs 4 to 7
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Group 1:
Outputs 0 to
15
Group 1:
Outputs 0 to 3
Group 1:
Outputs 0 to 7
Group 2:
Outputs 4 to 7
Group 2:
Outputs 8 to 15
Specifications
171
Output Specifications
Spec.
1762-OA8
1762-OB8
Output Group Verified by one
to Backplane of the following
dielectric tests:
Isolation
1836V ac for 1
sec. or 2596V
dc for 1 sec.
1762-OB16
Verified by one of the
following dielectric tests:
1200V ac for 1 sec. or 1697V
dc for 1 sec.
1762-OW8
1762-OW16
1762-OX6I
1762-IQ8OW6
Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V ac for 1 sec. or
2596V dc for 1 sec.
265V ac working voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)
75V dc working voltage (IEC
Class 2 reinforced insulation)
265V ac
working voltage
(IEC Class 2
reinforced
insulation)
Output Group
to Output
Group
Isolation
Verified by one
of the following
dielectric tests:
1836V ac for 1
sec. or 2596V
dc for 1 sec.
Not Applicable
Verified by one of the following dielectric tests: 1836V ac for 1 sec. or
2596V dc for 1 sec.
265V ac working voltage (basic insulation)
150V ac working voltage (IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)
265V ac
working voltage
(IEC Class 2
reinforced
insulation)
Vendor I.D.
Code
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Product Type
Code
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
Product Code
119
101
103
120
121
124
98
Relay Contact Ratings (1762-OW8, 1762-OW16, and 1762-IQ8OW6)
Maximum Volts
Amperes
Amperes Continuous
Make
Break
240V ac
7.5A
120V ac
15A
125V dc
0.22A(1)
1.0A
24V dc
1.2A(3)
2.0A
Volt-Amperes
Make
Break
0.75A
2.5A
(2)
1800 VA
180 VA
1.5A
2.5A(2)
1800 VA
180 VA
28 VA
(1) For dc voltage applications, the make/break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined by dividing 28 VA by the applied dc voltage. For example, 28 VA/48V dc =
0.58A. For dc voltage applications less than 14V, the make/break ratings for relay contacts cannot exceed 2A.
(2) 1.5A above 40 °C (104 °F).
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
172
Specifications
Relay Contact Ratings 1762-OX6I
Volts
(max.)
Continuous Amperes(3)
Amps per
Make
Break
Point
(1)
(max.)
Make
Break
240V ac
5.0 A
15 A
1.5 A
3600 VA
360 VA
120V ac
7.0 A(2)
30 A
3.0 A
125V dc
2.5 A
0.4 A
50 VA(4)
24V dc
7.0 A(2)
7.0 A
168 VA(4)
Voltamperes
(1) The continuous current per module must be limited so the module power does not exceed 1440VA.
(2) 6 A in ambient temperatures above 40 °C (104.°F)
(3) Surge Suppression – Connecting surge suppressors across your external inductive load will extend the
life of the relay contacts. For additional details, refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding
Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1.
(4) DC Make/Break Voltamperes must be limited to 50 VA for DC voltages between 28V dc and 125V dc. DC
Make/Break Voltamperes below 28V dc are limited by the 7 A Make/Break current limit.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Specifications
173
Module Load Ratings 1762-OX6I
Volts (max.)
Controlled Load (Current) per Module
(max.)
240V ac
6A
120V ac
12 A(1)
125V dc
11.5 A
24V dc
30 A(2)
(1) Current per relay limited to 6 A at ambient temperatures above 40 °C
(104.°F).
(2) 24 A in ambient temperatures above 40 °C (104.°F). Limited by ambient
temperature and the number of relays controlling loads. See below.
8
Ambient Temperature
below 40 °C (104.°F)
7
6
Ambient Temperature
above 40 °C (104.°F)
5
4
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
Maximum Current per Relay (Amps)
Relays Used vs. Maximum Current per Relay (24V dc) 1762-OX6I
Number of Relays Controlling Loads
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
174
Specifications
Analog Modules
Common Specifications
Specification
1762-IF2OF2, 1762-IF4, 1762-IR4, 1762-IT4 and 1762-OF4
Dimensions
90 mm (height) x 87 mm (depth) x 40 mm (width)
height including mounting tabs is 110 mm
3.54 in. (height) x 3.43 in. (depth) x 1.58 in. (width)
height including mounting tabs is 4.33 in.
Storage Temperature
-40 °C...85 °C (-40 °F...185 °F)
Operating Temperature
0 °C...55 °C (32 °F...131 °F)
Operating Humidity
5%...95% non-condensing
Operating Altitude
2000 meters (6561 feet)
Vibration
Operating: 10...500 Hz, 5 g, 0.030 in. max. peak-to-peak
Shock
Operating: 30 g
Module Power LED
On: indicates power is applied.
Recommended Cable
Belden 8761 (shielded)
(For 1762-IT4, Shielded thermocouple extension wire for the specific type of thermocouple you are
using. Follow thermocouple manufacturer’s recommendations.)
Agency Certification
C-UL certified (under CSA C22.2 No. 142)
UL 508 listed
CE compliant for all applicable directives
C-Tick markred for all applicable acts (1762-IR4 and 1762-IT4)
Hazardous Environment Class
Class I, Division 2, Hazardous Location, Groups A, B, C, D (UL 1604, C-UL under CSA C22.2 No. 213)
Noise Immunity
NEMA standard ICS 2-230
Radiated and Conducted Emissions EN50081-2 Class A
Electrical /EMC:
The module has passed testing at the following levels:
ESD Immunity (IEC1000-4-2)
4 kV contact, 8 kV air, 4 kV indirect
Radiated Immunity (IEC1000-4-3)
10 V/m, 80...1,000 MHz, 80% amplitude modulation, +900 MHz keyed carrier
Fast Transient Burst (IEC1000-4-4)
2 kV, 5 kHz
Surge Immunity (IEC1000-4-5)
1 kV galvanic gun
Conducted Immunity (IEC1000-4-6)
10V, 0.15...80 MHz(1) (2)
(1) Conducted Immunity frequency range may be 150 kHz to 30 MHz if the Radiated Immunity frequency range is 30 MHz to 1000 MHz.
(2) For grounded thermocouples, the 10V level is reduced to 3V.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Specifications
175
General Specifications
Specification
1762-IF2OF2
Approximate
Shipping Weight
(with carton)
240g (0.53 lbs.)
Bus Current Draw
(max.)
40 mA at 5V dc
105 mA at 24V dc
Analog Normal
Operating Range
Voltage: 0...10V dc
Current: 4...20 mA
Full Scale(1) Analog
Ranges
1762-IF4
1762-OF4
1762-IR4
1762-IT4
235g (0.517 lbs.)
260g (0.57 lbs.)
220g (0.53 lbs.)
40 mA at 5V dc
50 mA at 24V dc
40 mA at 5V dc
165 mA at 24V dc
40 mA at 5V dc
50 mA at 24V dc
40 mA at 5V dc
50 mA at 24V dc
Voltage: -10...+10V
dc
Current: 4...20 mA
Voltage 0...10V dc
Current: 4...20 mA
NA
NA
Voltage: 0...10.5V dc Voltage:
Current: 0...21 mA
-10.5...+10.5V dc
Current: -21...+21
mA
Voltage:0...10.5V dc
Current: 0...21 mA
NA
NA
Resolution
12 bits (unipolar)
15 bits
12 bits (unipolar)
Input filter and
configuration
dependent
15 bits plus sign
Repeatability(2)
±0.1%
±0.1%
±0.1%
±0.1 °C (±0.18 °F) for See Table 179
Ni and NiFe
±0.2 °C (±0.36
°F)...±0.2 °C (±0.36
°F) for other RTD
inputs
±0.04 ohm for 150
ohm resistances
±0.2 ohm for other
resistances
Input and Output
Group to System
Isolation
30V ac/30V dc rated working voltage(3)
(N.E.C. Class 2 required)
(IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation)
type test: 500V ac or 707V dc for 1 minute
30V ac/30V dc rated
working voltage
(IEC Class 2
reinforced
insulation)
type test: 500V ac or
707V dc for 1 minute
30V ac/30V dc
working voltage
type test: 500V ac or
707V dc for 1 minute
30V ac/30V dc
working voltage
qualification test:
720V dc for 1 minute
Vendor I.D. Code
1
1
1
1
1
Product Type Code
10
10
10
10
10
Product Code
75
67
66
65
64
(1) The over- or under-range flag comes on when the normal operating range (over/under) is exceeded. The module continues to convert the analog input up to the maximum
full scale range.
(2) Repeatability is the ability of the module to register the same reading in successive measurements for the same signal.
(3) Rated working voltage is the maximum continuous voltage that can be applied at the terminals with respect to earth ground.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
176
Specifications
Input Specifications
Specification
1762-IF2OF2
1762-IF4
1762-IR4
1762-IT4
Number of Inputs
2 differential (unipolar)
4 differential (bipolar)
4
4 input channels plus 1
CJC sensor
Update Time (typical)
2.5 ms
130, 250, 290, 450, 530
ms (selectable)
Input filter and
cofiguration dependent
NA
A/D Converter Type
Successive
approximation
Successive
approximation
Delta-Sigma
Delta-Sigma
Common Mode Voltage
Range(1)
±27V
±27V
NA
±10V
Common Mode
Rejection(2)
> 55 dB at 50 and 60 Hz
> 55 dB at 50 and 60 Hz
>110 dB at 50 Hz (with 10
or 50 Hz filter)
>110 dB at 60 Hz (with 10
or 60 Hz filter)
>110 dB at 50 Hz (with 10
or 50 Hz filter)
>110 dB at 60 Hz (with 10
or 60 Hz filter)
Non-linearity (in percent
full scale)
±0.1%
±0.1%
±0.05%
NA
Typical Overall
Accuracy(3)
±0.5% full scale at
0...55 °C
±0.3% full scale at 25 °C
±0.3% full scale at
0...55 °C
±0.24% full scale at 25
°C
±0.5 °C (F °) for Pt 385
NA
Input Impedance
Voltage Terminal:
200 KΩ
Current Terminal: 250 Ω
Voltage Terminal:
200 KΩ
Current Terminal: 275 Ω
>10 ΜΩ
>10 ΜΩ
Current Input Protection
±32 mA
±32 mA
NA
NA
Voltage Input Protection
±30V
±30V
NA
NA
Channel Diagnostics
Over or under range or
open circuit condition by
bit reporting for analog
inputs.
Over or under range or
open circuit condition by
bit reporting for analog
inputs.
Over or under range or
open circuit condition by
bit reporting for analog
inputs.
Over or under range or
open circuit condition by
bit reporting for analog
inputs.
(1) For proper operation, both the plus and minus input terminals must be within ±27V (±10V for 1762-IT4) of analog common.
(2) Vcm = 1 Vpk-pk AC
(3) Vcm = 0 (includes offset, gain, non-linearity and repeatability error terms)
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Specifications
177
Input Specifications 1762-IR4
Specification
Input Types
1762-IR4
• 100 Ω Platinum 385
• 200 Ω Platinum 385
• 500 Ω Platinum 385
• 1,000 Ω Platinum 385
• 100 Ω Platinum 3916
• 200 Ω Platinum 3916
• 500 Ω Platinum 3916
• 1,000 Ω Platinum 3916
• 10 Ω Copper 426
• 120 Ω Nickel 672
• 120 Ω Nickel 618
• 604 Ω Nickel-Iron 518
• 0...150 Ω
• 0...500 Ω
• 0...1,000 Ω
• 0...3,000 Ω
Heat Dissipation
1.5 Total Watts (The Watts per point, plus the minimum Watts, with all points enabled.)
Normal Mode Rejection Ratio
70 dB minimum at 50 Hz with the 10 or 50 Hz filter selected
70 dB minimum at 60 Hz with the 10 or 60 Hz filter selected
Typical Accuracy [Autocalibration
Enabled] at 25 ° C (77 °F) Ambient with
Module Operating Temperature at 25 ° C
(77 °F) (1)
±0.5 °C (°F) for Pt 385
±0.4 °C (°F) for Pt 3916
±0.2 °C (°F) for Ni
±0.3 °C (°F) for NiFe
±0.6 °C (°F) for Cu
±0.15 Ω for 150 Ω range
±0.5 Ω for 500 Ω range
±1.0 Ω for 1,000 Ω range
±1.5 Ω for 3,000 Ω range
Typical Accuracy [Autocalibration
Enabled] at 0...55 ° C (32...131 °F)(1)
±0.9 °C (°F) for Pt 385
±0.8 °C (°F) for Pt 3916
±0.4 °C (°F) for Ni
±0.5 °C (°F) for NiFe
±1.1 °C (°F) for Cu
±0.25 Ω for 150 Ω range
±0.8 Ω for 500 Ω range
±1.5 Ω for 1,000 Ω range
±2.5 Ω for 3,000 Ω range
Accuracy Drift at 0...55 ° C (32...131 °F)
±0.026 °C/°C (0.026 °F/°F) for Pt 385
±0.023 °C/°C (0.023 °F/°F) for Pt
3916
±0.012 °C/°C (0.012 °F/°F) for Ni
±0.015 °C/°C (0.015 °F/°F) for NiFe
±0.032 °C/°C (0.032 °F/°F) for Cu
±0.007 Ω/°C (0.012 Ω/°F) for 150 Ω range
±0.023 Ω/°C (0.041 Ω/°F) for 500 Ω range
±0.043 Ω/°C (0.077 Ω/°F) for 1,000 Ω range
±0.07 2Ω/°C (0.130 Ω/°F) for 3,000 Ω range
Excitation Current Source
0.5 mA and 1.0 mA selectable per channel
Open-Circuit Detection Time(2)
6...1212 ms
Input Channel Configuration
Via configuration software screen or the user program (by writing a unique bit pattern into the
module’s configuration file). Refer to your controller’s user manual to determine if user
program configuration is supported.
Calibration
The module performs autocalibration on channel enable and on a configuration change
between channels. You can also program the module to calibrate every five minutes.
Maximum Overload at Input Terminals
±35V dc continuous
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
178
Specifications
Input Specifications 1762-IR4
Specification
1762-IR4
Cable Impedance Max.
25 Ω (Operating with >25 Ω will reduce accuracy.)
Power Supply Distance Rating
6 (The module may not be more than 6 modules away from the system power supply.)
Channel to Channel Isolation
±10V dc
(1) Accuracy is dependent upon the Analog/Digital converter filter rate selection, excitation current selection, data format, and input noise.
(2) Open-circuit detection time is equal to channel update time.
Input Specifications 1762-IT4
Specification
Value
Heat Dissipation
1.5 Total Watts (The Watts per point, plus the
minimum Watts, with all points energized.)
Response Speed per Channel
Input filter and configuration dependent.
Rated Working Voltage(1)
30V ac/30V dc
Normal Mode Rejection Ratio
85 dB (minimum) at 50 Hz (with 10 Hz or 50 Hz filter)
85 dB (minimum) at 60 Hz (with 10 Hz or 60 Hz filter)
Maximum Cable Impedance
25 Ω (for specified accuracy)
Open-circuit Detection Time
7 ms...1.515 seconds(2)
Calibration
The module performs autocalibration upon power-up
and whenever a channel is enabled. You can also
program the module to calibrate every five minutes.
CJC Accuracy
±1.3 °C (±2.34 °F)
Maximum Overload at Input
Terminals
±35V dc continuous(3)
Input Channel Configuration
via configuration software screen or the user program
(by writing a unique bit pattern into the module’s
configuration file).
(1) Rated working voltage is the maximum continuous voltage that can be applied at the input terminal, including
the input signal and the value that floats above ground potential (for example, 30V dc input signal and 20V dc
potential above ground).
(2) Open-circuit detection time is equal to the module scan time, which is based on the number of enabled
channels, the filter frequency of each channel, and whether cyclic calibration is enabled..
(3) Maximum current input is limited due to input impedance.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Specifications
179
1762-IT4 Repeatability at 25 °C (77 °F)(1) (2)
Input Type
Repeatability for
10 Hz Filter
Thermocouple J
±0.1 °C [±0.18 °F]
Thermocouple N (-110 °C...1300 °C [-166 °F...2372 °F])
±0.1 °C [±0.18 °F]
Thermocouple N (-210 °C...-110 °C [-346 °F...-166 °F])
±0.25 °C [±0.45 °F]
Thermocouple T (-170 °C...400 °C [-274 °F...752 °F])
±0 .1 °C [±0.18 °F]
Thermocouple T (-270 °C...-170 °C [-454 °F...-274 °F])
±1.5 °C [±2.7 °F]
Thermocouple K (-270 °C...1370 °C [-454 °F...,498 °F])
±0.1 °C [±0.18 °F]
Thermocouple K (-270 °C...-170 °C [-454 °F...-274 °F])
±2.0 °C [±3.6 °F]
Thermocouple E (-220 °C...,000 °C [-364 °F...1832 °F])
±0.1 °C [±0.18 °F]
Thermocouple E (-270 °C...-220 °C [-454 °F...-364 °F])
±1.0 °C [±1.8 °F]
Thermocouples S and R
±0.4 °C [±0.72 °F]
Thermocouple C
±0.2 °C [±0.36 °F]
Thermocouple B
±0.7 °C [±1.26 °F]
±50 mV
±6 μV
±100 mV
±6 μV
(1) Repeatability is the ability of the input module to register the same reading in successive measurements for the
same input signal.
(2) Repeatability at any other temperature in the 0...60 °C (32...140 °F) range is the same as long as the
temperature is stable.
1762-IT4 Accuracy
With Autocalibration Enabled
Without Autocalibration
Accuracy(2) (3) for 10 Hz, 50 Hz and 60
Hz Filters (max.)
Maximum Temperature Drift(2)
(4)
at 25 °C [77 °F]
Ambient
at 0...60 °C
[32...140 °F]
Ambient
at 0...60 °C [32...140 °F]
Ambient
Thermocouple J (-210 °C...1200 °C [-346 °F...2192 °F])
±0.6 °C [± 1.1 °F]
±0.9 °C [± 1.7 °F]
±0.0218 °C/ °C [±0.0218 °F/ °F]
Thermocouple N (-200 °C...1300 °C [-328 °F...2372 °F])
±1 °C [± 1.8 °F]
±1.5 °C [±2.7 °F]
±0.0367 °C/ °C [±0.0367 °F/ °F]
Thermocouple N (-210 °C...-200 °C [-346 °F...-328 °F])
±1.2 °C [±2.2 °F]
±1.8 °C [±3.3 °F]
±0.0424 °C/ °C [±0.0424 °F/ °F]
Thermocouple T (-230 °C...400 °C [-382 °F...752 °F])
±1 °C [± 1.8 °F]
±1.5 °C [±2.7 °F]
±0.0349 °C/ °C [±0.0349 °F/ °F]
Thermocouple T (-270 °C...-230 °C [-454 °F...-382 °F])
±5.4 °C [± 9.8 °F]
±7.0 °C [±12.6 °F]
±0.3500 °C/ °C [±0.3500 °F/ °F]
Thermocouple K (-230 °C...1370 °C [-382 °F...2498 °F])
±1 °C [± 1.8 °F]
±1.5 °C [±2.7 °F]
±0.4995 °C/ °C [±0.4995 °F/ °F]
Thermocouple K (-270 °C...-225 °C [-454 °F...-373 °F])
±7.5 °C [± 13.5 °F]
±10 °C [± 18 °F]
±0.0378 °C/ °C [±0.0378 °F/ °F]
Thermocouple E (-210 °C...1000 °C [-346 °F...1832 °F])
±0.5 °C [± 0.9 °F]
±0.8 °C [±1.5 °F]
±0.0199 °C/ °C [±0.0199 °F/ °F]
Input Type(1)
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
180
Specifications
1762-IT4 Accuracy
With Autocalibration Enabled
Without Autocalibration
(2) (3)
Maximum Temperature Drift(2)
for 10 Hz, 50 Hz and 60
Accuracy
Hz Filters (max.)
(4)
at 25 °C [77 °F]
Ambient
at 0...60 °C
[32...140 °F]
Ambient
at 0...60 °C [32...140 °F]
Ambient
Thermocouple E (-270 °C...-210 °C [-454 °F...-346 °F])
±4.2 °C [± 7.6 °F]
±6.3 °C [±11.4 °F]
±0.2698 °C/ °C [±0.2698 °F/ °F]
Thermocouple R
±1.7 °C [± 3.1 °F]
±2.6 °C [± 4.7 °F]
±0.0613 °C/ °C [±0.0613 °F/ °F]
Thermocouple S
±1.7 °C [± 3.1 °F]
±2.6 °C [± 4.7 °F]
±0.0600 °C/ °C [±0.0600 °F/ °F]
Thermocouple C
±1.8 °C [±3.3 °F]
±3.5 °C [±6.3 °F]
±0.0899 °C/ °C [±0.0899 °F/ °F]
Thermocouple B
±3.0 °C [±5.4 °F]
±4.5 °C [±8.1 °F]
±0.1009 °C/ °C [±0.1009 °F/ °F]
±50 mV
±15 μV
±25 μV
±0.44μV/ °C [±0.80μV/ °F]
±100 mV
±20 μV
±30 μV
±0.69μV/ °C [±01.25μV/ °F]
Input Type(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
The module uses the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) ITS-90 standard for thermocouple linearization.
Accuracy and temperature drift information does not include the affects of errors or drift in the cold junction compensation circuit.
Accuracy is dependent upon the analog/digital converter output rate selection, data format, and input noise.
Temperature drift with autocalibration is slightly better than without autocalibration.
TIP
For more detailed 1762-IT4 accuracy information, see
publication 1762-UM002.
Output Specifications
Specification
1762-IF2OF2
1762-OF4
Number of Outputs
2 single-ended (unipolar)
4 single-ended (bipolar)
Update Time (typical)
4.5 ms
D/A Converter Type
Resistor string
R-2R Ladder Voltage Switching
Resistive Load on Current Output
0...500 Ω (includes wire resistance)
0...500 Ω (includes wire resistance)
Load Range on Voltage Output
> 1KΩ
> 1KΩ
Reactive Load, Current Output
< 0.1 mH
< 0.1 mH
Reactive Load, Voltage Output
< 1 μF
< 1 μF
Typical Overall Accuracy(1)
±1% full scale at 0...55 °C
±0.5% full scale at 25 °C
±1% full scale at 0...55 °C
±0.5% full scale at 25 °C
Output Ripple
range 0...500 Hz
(referred to output range)
< ±0.1%
< ±0.1%
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Specifications
181
Output Specifications
Specification
1762-IF2OF2
1762-OF4
Non-linearity (in percent full scale)
< ±0.5%
< ±0.5%
Open and Short-Circuit Protection
Continuous
Continuous
Output Protection
±32 mA
±32 mA
(1) Includes offset, gain, non-linearity and repeatability error terms.
Valid Input/Output Data Word Formats/Ranges for 1762-IF2OF2
Normal Operating Range
Full Scale Range
RAW/Proportional Data
Scaled-for-PID
0V...10V dc
10.5V dc
32,760
16,380
0.0V dc
0
0
21.0mA
32,760
16,380
20.0mA
31,200
15,600
4.0mA
6240
3120
0.0mA
0
0
4mA...20mA
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
182
Specifications
Notes:
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Appendix
B
Replacement Parts
This chapter contains the following information:
• a table of MicroLogix 1100 replacement parts
• procedure for replacing the lithium battery
• 1762 expansion I/O replacement parts
MicroLogix 1100
Replacement Kits
183
The table below provides a list of replacement parts and their catalog
number.
Description
Catalog
Number
Lithium Battery (See page 184.)
1763-BA
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
184
Replacement Parts
Lithium Battery (1763-BA)
IMPORTANT When the controller’s Battery Low indicator is lit, check
whether the battery wire connector is connected correctly or replace the replaceable battery with a new one
immediately. When the indicator turns on, it means that
either the battery is disconnected, or that the battery
requires replacement. The controller is designed to
operate for up to 2 weeks, from the time that the indicator first turns on. We recommend that you replace the
battery immediately when the indicator turns on.
Installation
Follow the procedure below to ensure proper replaceable battery
installation.
1. Insert a battery into the battery pocket with wires facing up.
2. Insert the battery wire connector into the battery connector.
3. Secure the battery connector wires along the wire guide, as
shown below.
Replaceable Battery Pocket
Replaceable Battery
Battery Wires
ESC
OK
Battery Wire Connector
Wire Guide
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Battery Connector
Replacement Parts
185
Battery Handling
Follow the procedure below to ensure proper battery operation and
reduce personnel hazards.
• Use only for the intended operation.
• Do not ship or dispose of cells except according to
recommended procedures.
• Do not ship on passenger aircraft.
ATTENTION
• Do not charge the batteries. An explosion could
result or the cells could overheat causing burns.
• Do not open, puncture, crush, or otherwise
mutilate the batteries. A possibility of an
explosion exists and/or toxic, corrosive, and
flammable liquids would be exposed.
• Do not incinerate or expose the batteries to high
temperatures. Do not attempt to solder batteries.
An explosion could result.
• Do not short positive and negative terminals
together. Excessive heat can build up and cause
severe burns.
Storage
Store lithium batteries in a cool, dry environment, typically 20 °C...2
5°C (68°F...77°F) and 40%...60% humidity. Store the batteries and a
copy of the battery instruction sheet in the original container, away
from flammable materials.
Transportation
One or Two Batteries
Each battery contains 0.23 g of lithium. Therefore, up to two batteries
can be shipped together within the United States without restriction.
Regulations governing shipment to or within other countries may
differ.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
186
Replacement Parts
Three or More Batteries
Procedures for the transportation of three or more batteries shipped
together within the United States are specified by the Department of
Transportation (DOT) in the Code of Federal Regulations, CFR49,
“Transportation.” An exemption to these regulations, DOT - E7052,
covers the transport of certain hazardous materials classified as
flammable solids. This exemption authorizes transport of lithium
batteries by motor vehicle, rail freight, cargo vessel, and cargo-only
aircraft, providing certain conditions are met. Transport by passenger
aircraft is not permitted.
A special provision of DOT-E7052 (11th Rev., October 21, 1982, par.
8-a) provides that:
“Persons that receive cell and batteries covered by this
exemption may reship them pursuant to the provisions of 49
CFR 173.22a in any of these packages authorized in this
exemption including those in which they were received.”
The Code of Federal Regulations, 49 CFR 173.22a, relates to the use of
packaging authorized under exemptions. In part, it requires that you
must maintain a copy of the exemption at each facility where the
packaging is being used in connection with shipment under the
exemption.
Shipment of depleted batteries for disposal may be subject to specific
regulation of the countries involved or to regulations endorsed by
those countries, such as the IATA Articles Regulations of the
International Air Transport Association, Geneva, Switzerland.
IMPORTANT
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Regulations for transportation of lithium batteries are
periodically revised. Refer to http://www.dot.gov for
the latest shipping information.
Replacement Parts
187
Disposal
ATTENTION
Do not incinerate or dispose of lithium batteries in
general trash collection. Explosion or violent rupture
is possible. Batteries should be collected for disposal
in a manner to prevent against short-circuiting,
compacting, or destruction of case integrity and
hermetic seal.
For disposal, batteries must be packaged and shipped in accordance
with transportation regulations, to a proper disposal site. The U.S.
Department of Transportation authorizes shipment of “Lithium
batteries for disposal” by motor vehicle only in regulation 173.1015 of
CFR 49 (effective January 5, 1983). For additional information contact:
U.S. Department of Transportation
Research and Special Programs Administration
400 Seventh Street, S.W.
Washington, D.C. 20590
Although the Environmental Protection Agency at this time has no
regulations specific to lithium batteries, the material contained may be
considered toxic, reactive, or corrosive. The person disposing of the
material is responsible for any hazard created in doing so. State and
local regulations may exist regarding the disposal of these materials.
For a lithium battery product safety data sheet, contact the
manufacturer:
Sanyo Energy Corporation
2001 Sanyo Avenue
San Diego, CA 92173
(619) 661-4801
Tadarand U.S. Battery Division
2 Seaview Blvd.
Port Washington, NY 11050
(516) 621-4980
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
188
Replacement Parts
1762 Expansion I/O
Expansion I/O Replacement Doors
Catalog Number 1762-RPLDR2
The expansion I/O door kit consists of:
• Two expansion I/O terminal doors
• Two expansion I/O (bus doors)
Expansion I/O Replacement DIN Latches
Catalog Number 1762-RPLDIN2
The expansion I/O DIN latch kit consists of five DIN latches for
expansion I/O.
Expansion I/O Replacement Door Labels
Catalog Number 1762-RPLTLBL2
The expansion I/O terminal door label kit consists of four labels each
for all available modules.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Appendix
C
Troubleshooting Your System
This chapter describes how to troubleshoot your controller. Topics
include:
•
•
•
•
Understanding the
Controller Indicator Status
understanding the controller status indicators
controller error recovery model
analog expansion I/O diagnostics and troubleshooting
calling Rockwell Automation for assistance
The MicroLogix 1100 provides three groups of status indicators:
• the status LEDs on the top of the controller,
• the status indicators on the LCD
• the I/O status indicators on the LCD.
Together they provide a mechanism to determine the current status
of the controller if a programming device is not present or available.
Controller Status LED Indicators
Controller LED Location
Controller LED Indicators
LED
Color
Indicates
POWER
off
No input power, or power error condition
green
Power on
off
Not executing the user program
RUN
189
green
Executing the user program in run mode
green flashing
Memory module transfer occurring
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
190
Troubleshooting Your System
Controller LED Indicators
LED
Color
Indicates
FAULT
off
No fault detected
red flashing
Application fault detected
red
Controller hardware faulted
off
No forces installed
amber
Forces installed
FORCE
Status Indicators on the LCD
CO
M
CO M0
M
M
DC 1
OM
BA M
T.
U- LO
M
SG
Status Indicators on the LCD
Status Indicators on the LCD
Indicator
Color
Indicates
COMM 0
off
(empty rectangle)
Not transmitting via RS-232/485 port (Channel 0)
on
(solid rectangle)
Transmitting via RS-232/485 port (Channel 0)
off
(empty rectangle)
Not transmitting via Ethernet port (Channel 1)
on
(solid rectangle)
Transmitting via Ethernet port (Channel 1)
off
(empty rectangle)
Configured communications
on
(solid rectangle)
Default communications
off
(empty rectangle)
Batterty level is acceptable
on
(solid rectangle)
Battery low
off
(empty rectangle)
Default display mode
on
(solid rectangle)
Customized display mode
COMM 1
DCOMM(1)
BAT. LO
U-MSG
(1)
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
When using a MicroLogix 1100 controller, the DCOMM LED applies only to Channel 0.
Troubleshooting Your System
191
I/O Status Indicators on the LCD
I/O Status Indicators on the LCD
I/O LED screen on the LCD
Input status indicators (10)
Output status indicators (6)
I/O Status Indicators on the LCD
Indicator
INPUTS
(1)
OUTPUTS
(1)
Color
Indicates
off
(empty rectangle)
Input is not energized
on
(solid rectangle)
Input is energized (terminal status)
off
(empty rectangle)
Output is not energized
on
(solid rectangle)
Output is engerized (logic status)
To view the status of inputs and outputs on the LCD, you need to enter the I/O LED mode screen using the LCD
menu. See I/O Status on page 5-109 for more information.
Normal Operation
The POWER and RUN LEDs are on. If a force condition is active, the
FORCE LED turns on and remains on until all forces are removed.
Error Conditions
If an error exists within the controller, the controller LEDs operate as
described in the following table.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
192
Troubleshooting Your System
If the LEDS
indicate:
The Following Error Probable Cause
Exists
Recommended Action
All LEDs off
No input power or
power supply error
No line Power
Verify proper line voltage and connections to the controller.
Power Supply
Overloaded
This problem can occur intermittently if power supply is overloaded
when output loading and temperature varies.
Power and
FAULT LEDs on
solid
Hardware faulted
Processor Hardware
Error
Cycle power. Contact your local Allen-Bradley representative if the
error persists.
Loose Wiring
Verify connections to the controller.
Power LED on
and FAULT LED
flashing
Application fault
Hardware/Software
Major Fault Detected
For error codes and Status File information, see MicroLogix 1100
Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual,
Publication 1763-RM001.
RUN
Operating system
fault
Missing or Corrupt
Operating System
See Missing/Corrupt OS LED Pattern on page D-201.
FORCE
FAULT LEDs all
flashing
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Troubleshooting Your System
Controller Error Recovery
Model
Identify the error code and
description.
No
193
Use the following error recovery model to help you diagnose software
and hardware problems in the micro controller. The model provides
common questions you might ask to help troubleshoot your system.
Refer to the recommended pages within the model for further help.
Is the error
hardware related?
Start
Yes
Refer to page 191 for
probable cause and
recommended action.
No
Are the wire
connections tight?
Tighten wire connections.
Yes
Clear Fault.
Is the Power
LED on?
No
Does the
controller have
power supplied?
Is the RUN
LED on?
Refer to page 191 for
probable cause and
recommended action.
No
Yes
Return controller to RUN or
any of the REM test modes.
Is the Fault
LED on?
Yes
Test and verify system
operation.
Check power.
Yes
Yes
Correct the condition
causing the fault.
No
Refer to page 191 for
probable cause and
recommended action.
No
Is an input LED
accurately showing
status?
No
Yes
Refer to page 191 for
probably cause and
recommended action.
End
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
194
Troubleshooting Your System
Analog Expansion I/O
Diagnostics and
Troubleshooting
Module Operation and Channel Operation
The module performs operations at two levels:
• module level
• channel level
Module-level operations include functions such as power-up,
configuration, and communication with the controller.
Internal diagnostics are performed at both levels of operation. Both
module hardware and channel configuration error conditions are
reported to the controller. Channel over-range or under-range
conditions are reported in the module’s input data table. Module
hardware errors are reported in the controller’s I/O status file. Refer to
the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set
Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001 for more information.
When a fault condition is detected, the analog outputs are reset to
zero.
Power-up Diagnostics
At module power-up, a series of internal diagnostic tests are
performed.
Module Status LED State Table
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
If module
status LED is
Indicated
condition
Corrective action
On
Proper Operation
No action required.
Off
Module Fault
Cycle power. If condition persists, replace the
module. Call your local distributor or
Allen-Bradley for assistance.
Troubleshooting Your System
195
Critical and Non-Critical Errors
Non-critical module errors are recoverable. Channel errors (over-range
or under-range errors) are non-critical. Non-critical error conditions
are indicated in the module input data table. Non-critical configuration
errors are indicated by the extended error code. See Table on page
C-197.
Critical module errors are conditions that prevent normal or
recoverable operation of the system. When these types of errors
occur, the system leaves the run mode of operation. Critical module
errors are indicated in Table on page C-197.
Module Error Definition Table
Analog module errors are expressed in two fields as four-digit Hex
format with the most significant digit as “don’t care” and irrelevant.
The two fields are “Module Error” and “Extended Error Information”.
The structure of the module error data is shown below.
Module Error Table
“Don’t Care” Bits
Module Error
Extended Error Information
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Hex Digit 4
Hex Digit 3
Hex Digit 2
Hex Digit 1
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
196
Troubleshooting Your System
Module Error Field
The purpose of the module error field is to classify module errors into
three distinct groups, as described in the table below. The type of
error determines what kind of information exists in the extended error
information field. These types of module errors are typically reported
in the controller’s I/O status file. Refer to the MicroLogix 1100
Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual,
publication 1763-RM001 for more information.
.
Module Error Types
Error Type
Module Error Field Value Description
Bits 11 through 09
(Binary)
No Errors
000
No error is present. The extended error field holds no additional information.
Hardware Errors
001
General and specific hardware error codes are specified in the extended error
information field.
Configuration Errors
010
Module-specific error codes are indicated in the extended error field. These error
codes correspond to options that you can change directly. For example, the input
range or input filter selection.
Extended Error Information Field
Check the extended error information field when a non-zero value is
present in the module error field. See Table on page C-197.
TIP
If no errors are present in the module error field, the
extended error information field is set to zero.
Hardware Errors
General or module-specific hardware errors are indicated by module
error code 2. See .
Configuration Errors
If you set the fields in the configuration file to invalid or unsupported
values, the module ignores the invalid configuration, generates a
non-critical error, and keeps operating with the previous
configuration.
The table below lists the configuration error codes defined for the
module.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Troubleshooting Your System
197
Error Codes
Extended Error Codes for 1762-IF2OF2
Error Type
Hex
Equivalent(1)
Module
Extended Error Error Description
Error Code Information Code
Binary
Binary
No Error
X000
000
0 0000 0000
No error
General Common
Hardware Error
X200
001
0 0000 0000
General hardware error; no additional information
X201
001
0 0000 0001
Power-up reset state
Hardware-Specific X210
Error
001
0 0001 0000
Reserved
Configuration Error X400
010
0 0000 0000
General configuration error; no additional information
X401
010
0 0000 0001
Invalid input data format selected (channel 0)
X402
010
0 0000 0010
Invalid input data format selected (channel 1)
X403
010
0 0000 0011
Invalid output data format selected (channel 0)
X404
010
0 0000 0100
Invalid output data format selected (channel 1)
(1)
X represents “Don’t Care”.
Extended Error Codes for 1762-IF4 and 1762-OF4
Error Type
Hex
Equivalent(1)
Module
Extended Error Error Description
Error Code Information Code
Binary
Binary
No Error
X000
000
0 0000 0000
No error
General Common
Hardware Error
X200
001
0 0000 0000
General hardware error; no additional information
X201
001
0 0000 0001
Power-up reset state
X300
001
1 0000 0000
Reserved
Configuration Error X400
010
0 0000 0000
General configuration error; no additional information
X401
010
0 0000 0001
Invalid range select (Channel 0)
X402
010
0 0000 0010
Invalid range select (Channel 1)
X403
010
0 0000 0011
Invalid range select (Channel 2)
X404
010
0 0000 0100
Invalid range select (Channel 3)
X405
010
0 0000 0101
Invalid filter select (Channel 0) – 1762-IF4 only
X406
010
0 0000 0110
Invalid filter select (Channel 1) – 1762-IF4 only
X407
010
0 0000 0111
Invalid filter select (Channel 2) – 1762-IF4 only
X408
010
0 0000 1000
Invalid filter select (Channel 3) – 1762-IF4 only
X409
010
0 0000 1001
Invalid format select (Channel 0)
X40A
010
0 0000 1010
Invalid format select (Channel 1)
X40B
010
0 0000 1011
Invalid format select (Channel 2)
X40C
010
0 0000 1100
Invalid format select (Channel 3)
HardwareSpecific Error
(1)
X represents “Don’t Care”.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
198
Troubleshooting Your System
Calling Rockwell
Automation for Assistance
If you need to contact Rockwell Automation or local distributor for
assistance, it is helpful to obtain the following (prior to calling):
• controller type, series letter, revision letter, and firmware (FRN)
number of the controller
• controller indicator status
• controller error codes (Refer to MicroLogix 1100 Programmable
Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, Publication
1763-RM001 for error code information.)
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Appendix
D
Using Control Flash to Upgrade Your
Operating System
The operating system (OS) can be upgraded through the
communication port on the controller. In order to download a new
operating system, you must have the following:
• ControlFlash Upgrade Kit containing the new OS
Go to http://www.ab.com/micrologix to download the upgrade
kit.
• a Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000,
Windows NT or Windows XP based computer to run the
download software.
The ControlFlash Upgrade Kit includes:
• the operating system upgrade to be downloaded.
• the ControlFlash programming tool, along with its support
drivers and on-line help.
• a readme first file explaining how to upgrade the operating
system.
Preparing for Upgrade
Before upgrading the controller’s operating system, you must:
• install ControlFlash software on your personal computer.
• prepare the controller for updating.
IMPORTANT
Installing a new operating system deletes the user
program. After the operating system upgrade is
successful, you must transfer your control program
back to the controller. The communication
parameters are described on Table on page 4-72.
Install ControlFlash Software
Double click the 1763-LEC-FRNxx.msi file to install the operating
system upgrade (where xx is the firmware revision number).
199
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
200
Using Control Flash to Upgrade Your Operating System
Prepare the Controller for Updating
Connect the computer COM port to channel 0 on the MicroLogix 1100
using a 1761-CBL-PM02 cable.
Controller Configuration
The controller must be configured for default communications (use
the Communications Toggle Functionality which is available on the
LCD; DCOMM indicator on) and be in the Program mode (use the
Mode Switch which is available on the LCD.) to allow the download
of a new operating system.
See Using the Communications Toggle Functionality on page 4-72 for
information about how to use the Communications Toggle
Functionality.
See Using the Mode Switch on page 5-125 for information about
controller modes and how to use the Mode Switch.
Sequence of Operation
The following steps detail the key events in the upgrade process.
1. Controller mode and communications parameters are checked.
The screen as shown below is displayed on the LCD as well.
2. Download begins.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Using Control Flash to Upgrade Your Operating System
201
3. During the download, the Run, Force, and Fault LEDs perform a
walking bit pattern. The screen as shown below is displayed on
the LCD as well.
4. When the download is complete, the integrity of the new OS is
checked. If the new OS is corrupt, the controller sends an error
message to the download tool and flashes the Missing or
Corrupt OS LED pattern. See Missing/Corrupt OS LED Pattern
below.
5. Following a successful transfer, the Run, Force, and Fault LEDs
flash on and remain on for five seconds. Then the controller
resets.
Missing/Corrupt OS LED
Pattern
When an operating system download is not successful or if the
controller does not contain a valid operating system, the controller
flashes the Run, Force, and Fault LEDs on and off.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
202
Using Control Flash to Upgrade Your Operating System
Notes:
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Appendix
E
Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485
Interface
The following protocols are supported from the RS-232/485
communication channel (Channel 0):
•
•
•
•
•
•
RS-232 Communication
Interface
DF1 Full Duplex
DF1 half-duplex Master/Slave
DF1 Radio Modem
DH-485
Modbus RTU Master/Slave
ASCII
The communications port on the MicroLogix 1100 utilizes a combined
RS-232/485 interface. RS-232 and RS-485 are Electronics Industries
Association (EIA) standards that specify the electrical and mechanical
characteristics for serial binary communication. They provide a variety
of system configuration possibilities. (RS-232 and RS-485 define
electrical connection characteristics, not protocols.)
One of the biggest benefits of an RS-232 interface is that it lets you
integrate telephone and radio modems into your control system (using
the appropriate DF1 protocol only, not DH-485 protocol), but it is for
point-to-point connections only between two devices.
RS-485 Communication
Interface
The RS-485 interface supports connection of up to 32 devices in a
multidrop hard-wired configuration using DH-485, DF1-Half
Duplex(1), or Modbus protocols. Also, the RS-485 interface supports
connection in a multidrop hard-wired configuration using ASCII
protocols(1).
DF1 Full-Duplex Protocol
DF1 Full-Duplex protocol provides a point-to-point connection
between two devices. DF1 Full-Duplex protocol combines data
transparency (American National Standards Institute ANSI - X3.28-1976
specification subcategory D1) and 2-way simultaneous transmission
with embedded responses (subcategory F1).
(1)
203
OS Series B FRN 4 or later.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
204
Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface
The MicroLogix 1100 controller supports the DF1 Full-Duplex protocol
via RS-232 connection to external devices, such as computers, or other
controllers that support DF1 Full-Duplex.
DF1 is an open protocol. Refer to DF1 Protocol and Command Set
Reference Manual, publication 1770-6.5.16, for more information.
DF1 Full-Duplex protocol (also referred to as DF1 point-to-point
protocol) is useful where RS-232 point-to-point communication is
required. DF1 protocol controls message flow, detects and signals
errors, and retries if errors are detected.
Example DF1 Full-Duplex Connections
For information about required network connecting equipment, see
Chapter 4, Communication Connections.
Personal Computer
CH0
MicroLogix 1100
Personal Computer
Modem cable
1761-CBL-PM02
Modem
Null modem
CH0
adapter
Modem
DF1 Half-Duplex Protocol
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
MicroLogix 1100
1761-CBL-PM02
DF1 Half-Duplex protocol is a multi-drop single master/multiple slave
network. DF1 Half-Duplex protocol supports data transparency
(American National Standards Institute ANSI - X3.28-1976 specification
subcategory D1). In contrast to DF1 Full-Duplex, communication
takes place in one direction at a time. You can use the RS-232/485
port on the MicroLogix 1100 as both a Half-Duplex programming port
and a Half-Duplex peer-to-peer messaging port.
Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface
205
DF1 Half-Duplex Operation
A DF1 Half-Duplex master device initiates all communication by
“polling” each slave device. The slave device may only transmit when
it is polled by the master. It is the master’s responsibility to poll each
slave on a regular and sequential basis to allow slave devices an
opportunity to communicate.
An additional feature of the DF1 Half-Duplex protocol is that it is
possible for a slave device to enable a MSG write or read to/from
another slave. When the initiating slave is polled, the MSG is sent to
the master. The master recognizes that the message is not intended for
it, but for another slave, so the master immediately forwards the
message to the intended slave. The master does this automatically;
you do not need to program the master to move data between slave
nodes. This slave-to-slave transfer can also be used by programming
software to allow slave-to-slave upload and download of programs to
processors (including the master) on the DF1 Half-Duplex link.
MicroLogix 1100 can act as the master or as a slave on a Half-Duplex
network. When the MicroLogix 1100 is a slave device, a master device
is required to “run” the network. Several other Allen-Bradley products
support DF1 Half-Duplex master protocol. They include the SLC
5/03™ and higher processors, enhanced PLC-5 processors, MicroLogix
1200/1500 and Rockwell Software RSLinx (version 2.x and higher).
DF1 Half-Duplex supports up to 255 devices (address 0 to 254) with
address 255 reserved for master broadcasts. As a DF1 Half-Duplex
slave device, the MicroLogix 1100 supports broadcast reception. As a
DF1 Half-Duplex master, the MicroLogix 1100 supports both the
reception and initiation of broadcast write commands (via the MSG
instruction). The MicroLogix 1100 also supports Half-Duplex modems
using RTS/CTS hardware handshaking.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
206
Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface
Example DF1 Half-Duplex Connections
Rockwell Software RSLinx 2.0 (or
later), SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC
5/05, PLC-5, MicroLogix 1100, or
MicroLogix 1200 and 1500
processors configured for DF1
Half-Duplex Master.
RS-232
(DF1 Half-Duplex Protocol)
Modem
TERM
TERM
A
TERM
A
B
A
B
COM
B
COM
SHLD
COM
SHLD
CHS GND
TX
TX
SHLD
CHS GND
TX
TX
PWR
TX
DC SOURCE
CHS GND
TX
TX
PWR
TX
DC SOURCE
CABLE
MicroLogix
1100 (Slave)
PWR
CABLE
EXTERNAL
MicroLogix
1000 (Slave)
TX
DC SOURCE
CABLE
EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL
MicroLogix
1200 (Slave)
MicroLogix
1500 (Slave)
SLC 5/04
(Slave)
SLC 5/03 with
1747-KE Interface
Module (Slave)
Considerations When Communicating as a DF1 Slave
on a Multi-drop Link
When communication is between either your programming software
and a MicroLogix Programmable Controller or between two
MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers via slave-to-slave
communication on a larger multi-drop link, the devices depend on a
DF1 Half-Duplex Master to give each of them access in a timely
manner. As the number of slave devices increase, the time between
when slave devices are polled also increases. This increase in time
may also be large if you are using low baud rates. As these time
periods grow, you may need to increase the poll timeout and reply
timeout values for slave devices.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface
IMPORTANT
207
If a program download is started when using DF1
Half-Duplex, but then is interrupted due to
electromagnetic interference or other events,
discontinue communications to the controller for the
ownership timeout period and then restart the
program download. The ownership timeout period is
60 seconds. After the timeout, you can re-establish
communications with the processor and try the
program download again. The only other way to
remove program ownership is to cycle power on the
processor.
Using Modems with MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers
The types of modems you can use with MicroLogix 1100 controllers
include the following:
• dial-up phone modems.
A MicroLogix 1100 controller, on the receiving end of the
dial-up connection, can be configured for DF1 Full-Duplex
protocol with or without handshaking. The modem connected
to the MicroLogix controller should support auto-answer. The
MicroLogix 1100 supports ASCII out communications. Therefore,
it can cause a modem to initiate or disconnect a phone call.
• leased-line modems.
Leased-line modems are used with dedicated phone lines that
are typically leased from the local phone company. The
dedicated lines may be in a point-to-point topology supporting
Full-Duplex communications between two modems or in a
multi-drop topology supporting Half-Duplex communications
between three or more modems.
• radio modems.
Radio modems may be implemented in a point-to-point
topology supporting either Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex
communications, or in a multi-drop topology supporting
Half-Duplex communications between three or more modems.
MicroLogix 1100 also supports DF1 Radio Modem protocol.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
208
Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface
• line drivers.
Line drivers, also called short-haul modems, do not actually
modulate the serial data, but rather condition the electrical
signals to operate reliably over long transmission distances (up
to several miles). Line drivers are available in Full-Duplex and
Half-Duplex models. Allen-Bradley’s AIC+ Advanced Interface
Converter is a Half-Duplex line driver that converts an RS-232
electrical signal into an RS-485 electrical signal, increasing the
signal transmission distance from 50 to 4000 feet (8000 feet
when bridged).
For point-to-point Full-Duplex modem connections that do not
require any modem handshaking signals to operate, use DF1
Full-Duplex protocol with no handshaking. For point-to-point
Full-Duplex modem connections that require RTS/CTS handshaking,
use DF1 Full-Duplex protocol with handshaking.
For radio modem connections, use DF1 Radio Modem protocol,
especially if store and forward capability is required.
For general multi-drop modem connections, or for point-to-point
modem connections that require RTS/CTS handshaking, use DF1
Half-Duplex slave protocol. In this case, one (and only one) of the
other devices must be configured for DF1 Half-Duplex master
protocol.
IMPORTANT
TIP
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Never attempt to use DH-485 protocol through
modems under any circumstance.
All MicroLogix controllers support RTS/CTS modem
handshaking when configured for DF1 Full-Duplex
protocol with the control line parameter set to
Full-Duplex Modem Handshaking or DF1
Half-Duplex slave protocol with the control line
parameter set to “Half-Duplex Modem”. No other
modem handshaking lines (i.e. Data Set Ready and
Data Terminal Ready) are supported by MicroLogix
1100 controller. MicroLogix 1100 controller also does
not support DCD (Data Carrier Detect).
Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface
DH-485 Communication
Protocol
209
The DH-485 protocol defines the communication between multiple
devices that coexist on a single pair of wires. DH-485 protocol uses
RS-485 Half-Duplex as its physical interface. (RS-485 is a definition of
electrical characteristics; it is not a protocol.) RS-485 uses devices that
are capable of co-existing on a common data circuit, thus allowing
data to be easily shared between devices.
The DH-485 network offers:
•
•
•
•
interconnection of 32 devices
multi-master (peer-to-peer) capability
token passing access control
the ability to add or remove nodes without disrupting the
network
• maximum network segment of 1,219 m (4,000 ft.)
The DH-485 protocol supports two classes of devices: initiators and
responders. All initiators on the network get a chance to initiate
message transfers. To determine which initiator has the right to
transmit, a token passing algorithm is used.
Control of message transfers on the DH-485 network is performed by
rotating the token along the nodes on the network. A node holding
the token can send a message onto the network. Each node is allowed
a fixed number of transmissions (based on the Token Hold Factor)
each time it receives the token. After a node sends a message, it
passes the token to the next device.
The allowable range of node addresses is 1 to 31. There must be at
least one initiator on the network (such as a MicroLogix controller, or
an SLC 5/02 or later processor).
DH-485 Configuration Parameters
When MicroLogix communications are configured for DH-485, the
following parameters can be changed:
DF1 Full-Duplex Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Options
Baud Rate
9600, 19.2K
Node Address
1 to 31 decimal
Token Hold Factor
1 to 4
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
210
Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface
See Software Considerations on page 212 for tips on setting the
parameters listed above.
Devices that use the DH-485 Network
In addition to the MicroLogix 1100 controllers, the devices shown in
the following table also support the DH-485 network.
Allen-Bradley Devices that Support DH-485 Communication
Catalog
Number
Bulletin 1761
Controllers
Bulletin 1762
Description
Installation Function
Publication
MicroLogix 1000
These controllers support DH-485 communications.
1761-6.3
These controllers support DH-485 communications.
1762-UM001
Bulletin 1764
MicroLogix 1500
These controllers support DH-485 communications.
1764-UM001
Bulletin 1747
Processors
1746-BAS
SLC 500
Processors
BASIC Module
Series C or
later
Series A or
later
Series A or
later
SLC Chassis
MicroLogix 1200
These processors support a variety of I/O requirements and
functionality.
SLC Chassis Provides an interface for SLC 500 devices to foreign devices.
Program in BASIC to interface the 3 channels (2 RS232 and 1
DH-485) to printers, modems, or the DH-485 network for data
collection.
2760-RB
Flexible Interface (1771) PLC
Provides an interface for SLC 500 (using protocol cartridge
Module
Chassis
2760-SFC3) to other A-B PLCs and devices. Three configurable
channels are available to interface with Bar Code, Vision, RF,
Dataliner™, and PLC systems.
1784-PKTX,
PC DH-485 IM
PCI Computer Provides DH-485 using RSLinx.
-PKTXD
Bus
1784-PCMK
PCMCIA IM
PCMCIA slot Provides DH-485 using RSLinx.
in computer
PanelView 550 and Panel Mount Provides electronic operator interface for SLC 500 processors.
2711-K5A2,
-B5A2, -K5A5, PanelView 900
-B5A5, -K5A1, Operator Terminals
-B5A1, -K9A2,
-T9A2, -K9A5,
-T9A5, -K9A1,
and -T9A1
1747-UM011
1746-UM004
1746-PM001
1746-RM001
1747-6.12
2760-ND001
1784-6.5.22
1784-6.5.19
2711-UM014
NA = Not Applicable
Important DH-485 Network Planning Considerations
Carefully plan your network configuration before installing any
hardware. Some of the factors that can affect system performance are:
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface
211
• amount of electrical noise, temperature, and humidity in the
network environment.
• number of devices on the network.
• connection and grounding quality in installation.
• amount of communication traffic on the network.
• type of process being controlled.
• network configuration.
The major hardware and software issues you need to resolve before
installing a network are discussed in the following sections.
Hardware Considerations
You need to decide the length of the communication cable, where
you route it, and how to protect it from the environment where it will
be installed.
When the communication cable is installed, you need to know how
many devices are to be connected during installation and how many
devices will be added in the future. The following sections help you
understand and plan the network.
Number of Devices and Length of Communication Cable
The maximum length of the communication cable is 1219 m (4000 ft).
This is the total cable distance from the first node to the last node in a
segment. However, two segments can be used to extend the DH-485
network to 2438 m (8000 ft.). For additional information on
connections using the AIC+, refer to the Advanced Interface Converter
(AIC+) User Manual, publication 1761-6.4.
Planning Cable Routes
Follow these guidelines to help protect the communication cable from
electrical interference:
• Keep the communication cable at least 1.52 m (5 ft.) from any
electric motors, transformers, rectifiers, generators, arc welders,
induction furnaces, or sources of microwave radiation.
• If you must run the cable across power feed lines, run the cable
at right angles to the lines.
• If you do not run the cable through a contiguous metallic
wireway or conduit, keep the communication cable at least 0.15
m (6 in.) from ac power lines of less than 20 A, 0.30 m (1 ft.)
from lines greater than 20 A, but only up to 100K VA, and 0.60
m (2 ft.) from lines of 100 K VA or more.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
212
Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface
• If you run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or
conduit, keep the communication cable at least 0.08 m (3 in.)
from ac power lines of less than 20 A, 0.15 m (6 in.) from lines
greater than 20 A, but only up to 100 K VA, and 0.30 m (1 ft.)
from lines of 100 K VA or more.
Running the communication cable through conduit provides
extra protection from physical damage and electrical
interference. If you route the cable through conduit, follow
these additional recommendations:
– Use ferromagnetic conduit near critical sources of electrical
interference. You can use aluminum conduit in non-critical
areas.
– Use plastic connectors to couple between aluminum and
ferromagnetic conduit. Make an electrical connection around
the plastic connector (use pipe clamps and the heavy gauge
wire or wire braid) to hold both sections at the same
potential.
– Ground the entire length of conduit by attaching it to the
building earth ground.
– Do not let the conduit touch the plug on the cable.
– Arrange the cables loosely within the conduit. The conduit
should contain only serial communication cables.
– Install the conduit so that it meets all applicable codes and
environmental specifications.
For more information on planning cable routes, see Industrial
Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1.
Software Considerations
Software considerations include the configuration of the network and
the parameters that can be set to the specific requirements of the
network. The following are major configuration factors that have a
significant effect on network performance:
• number of nodes on the network
• addresses of those nodes
• baud rate
The following sections explain network considerations and describe
ways to select parameters for optimum network performance (speed).
See your programming software’s user manual for more information.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface
213
Number of Nodes
The number of nodes on the network directly affects the data transfer
time between nodes. Unnecessary nodes (such as a second
programming terminal that is not being used) slow the data transfer
rate. The maximum number of nodes on the network is 32.
Setting Node Addresses
The best network performance occurs when node addresses are
assigned in sequential order. Initiators, such as personal computers,
should be assigned the lowest numbered addresses to minimize the
time required to initialize the network. The valid range for the
MicroLogix 1100 controllers is 1...31 (controllers cannot be node 0).
The default setting is 1. The node address is stored in the controller
Communications Status file (CS0:5/0 to CS0:5/7).
Setting Controller Baud Rate
The best network performance occurs at the highest baud rate, which
is 19,200. This is the default baud rate for a MicroLogix 1100 device on
the DH-485 network. All devices must be at the same baud rate. This
rate is stored in the controller Communications Status file (CS0:5/8 to
CS0:5/15).
Setting Maximum Node Address
Once you have an established network set up and are confident that
you will not be adding more devices, you may enhance performance
by adjusting the maximum node address of your controllers. It should
be set to the highest node address being used.
IMPORTANT
All devices should be set to the same maximum node
address.
MicroLogix Remote Packet Support
MicroLogix 1100 controllers can respond and initiate with
communications (or commands) that do not originate on the local
DH-485 network. This is useful in installations where communication
is needed between DH-485 and DH+ networks.
The example below shows how to send messages from a device on
the DH+ network to a MicroLogix controller on the DH-485 network.
This method uses an SLC 5/04 processor as the bridge connection.
When using this method (as shown in the illustration below):
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
214
Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface
• PLC-5 devices can send read and write commands to MicroLogix
1100 controllers.
• MicroLogix 1100 controllers can respond to MSG instructions
received.
• The MicroLogix 1100 controllers can initiate MSG instructions to
devices on the DH+ network.
• PC can send read and write commands to MicroLogix 1100
controllers.
• PC can do remote programming of MicroLogix 1100 controllers.
Use a 1763-NC01 Series A or later cable to connect
a MicroLogix 1100 controller to a DH-485 network.
TIP
You can connect a MicroLogix 1100 controller to
your DH-485 network directly without using a
RS-232 to RS-485 converter and optical isolator, such
as the AIC+, catalog number 1761-NET-AIC, as
shown in the illustration below, because Channel 0
has isolation and RS-485 built-in.
AIC+
AIC+
TERM
TERM
A
A-B
A
B
B
COM
COM
SHLD
SHLD
CHS GND
PanelView
CHS GND
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
PWR
TX
PWR
DC SOURCE
DC SOURCE
CABLE
CABLE
EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL
SLC 5/04
PanelView 550
DH-485 Network
AIC+
AIC+
TERM
A
A
A
B
B
B
COM
COM
COM
SHLD
SHLD
SHLD
AIC+
AIC+
TERM
TERM
CHS GND
TERM
A
CHS GND
B
CHS GND
COM
TX
TX
TX
TX
TX
SHLD
TX
CHS GND
TX
TX
TX
PWR
TX
TX
PWR
PWR
DC SOURCE
DC SOURCE
CABLE
DC SOURCE
CABLE
TX
PWR
CABLE
DC SOURCE
EXTERNAL
CABLE
EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL
MicroLogix 1000
MicroLogix 1100
MicroLogix 1200
MicroLogix 1500
SLC 5/04
DH+ Network
Personal Computer
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
SLC 5/04
PLC-5
Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface
215
Example DH-485 Connections
The following network diagrams provide examples of how to connect
MicroLogix 1100 controllers to the DH-485 network. You can connect
a MicroLogix 1100 controller to your DH-485 network directly without
using a RS-232 to RS-485 converter and optical isolator, such as the
Advanced Interface Converter (AIC+), catalog number 1761-NET-AIC,
as shown in the illustrations below, because Channel 0 has isolation
and RS-485 built-in.
However, you may need to use an AIC+ to connect other controllers
to a DH-485 network. For more information on the AIC+, see the
Advanced Interface Converter and DeviceNet Interface Installation
Instructions, Publication 1761-5.11.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
216
Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface
DH-485 Network with a MicroLogix 1100 Controller
AIC+
AIC+
TERM
TERM
A
B
COM
COM
SHLD
SHLD
CHS GND
TX
TX
A-B
A
B
TX
PWR
TX
DC SOURCE
TX
PWR
DC SOURCE
CABLE
CABLE
EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL
SLC 5/04
PanelView 550
DH-485 Network
AIC+
AIC+
TERM
TX
PWR
TX
DC SOURCE
TX
PWR
TX
MicroLogix 1000
TX
PWR
TX
TX
PWR
DC SOURCE
CABLE
EXTERNAL
ESC
CHS GND
TX
DC SOURCE
CABLE
EXTERNAL
SHLD
CHS GND
TX
DC SOURCE
CABLE
COM
SHLD
CHS GND
TX
B
COM
SHLD
CHS GND
A
B
COM
SHLD
TERM
A
B
COM
TX
TERM
A
B
AIC+
AIC+
TERM
A
TX
PanelView
CHS GND
TX
CABLE
EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL
OK
Personal
Computer
MicroLogix 1100
DH-485 Network
MicroLogix 1200
MicroLogix 1500
Belden, shielded, twisted-pair cable (see table below)
Belden, shielded, twisted-pair cable (see table below)
AIC+
(2)
TERM
1763-NC01(4)
A
(3)
B
COM
SHLD
CHS GND
TX
TX
TX
PWR
1761-CBL-AP00
or 1761-CBL-PM02
DC SOURCE
CABLE
(1)
ESC
EXTERNAL
OK
24V dc (user supplied)
1747-CP3
or 1761-CBL-AC00
(1) DB-9 RS-232 port
(2) mini-DIN 8 RS-232 port
(3) RS-485 port
(4) Series A or later cables are required.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
port 1 or port 2
to PC
Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface
217
Typical 3-Node Network
PanelView 550
A-B
PanelView
MicroLogix 1100
1761-CBL-AM00
or 1761-CBL-HM02
RJ45 port
AIC+
1761-CBL-AS09
or 1761-CBL-AS03
TERM
A
B
COM
SHLD
CHS GND
TX
TX
TX
PWR
DC SOURCE
CABLE
EXTERNAL
1747-CP3 or 1761-CBL-AC00
TIP
Modbus Communication
Protocol
This 3-node network is not expandable.
Modbus is a Half-Duplex, master-slave communications protocol. The
Modbus network master reads and writes coils and registers. Modbus
protocol allows a single master to communicate with a maximum of
247 slave devices. MicroLogix 1100 controllers support Modbus RTU
Master and Modbus RTU Slave protocol.
For more information on configuring your MicroLogix 1100 controller
for Modbus protocol, refer to the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable
Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001.
For more information about the Modbus protocol, see the Modbus
Protocol Specifications (available from http://www.modbus.org).
ASCII
ASCII provides connection to other ASCII devices, such as bar code
readers, weigh scales, serial printers, and other intelligent devices.
You can use ASCII by configuring the RS-232/485 port, channel 0 for
ASCII driver. Refer to the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers
Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication 1763-RM001 for detailed
configuration information.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
218
Connecting to Networks via RS-232/RS-485 Interface
Notes:
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Appendix
F
Connecting to Networks via Ethernet
Interface
This appendix:
• describes MicroLogix 1100 controllers and Ethernet
communication.
• describes MicroLogix 1100 performance considerations.
• describes Ethernet network connections and media.
• explains how the MicroLogix 1100 establishes node connections.
• lists Ethernet configuration parameters and procedures.
• describes configuration for subnet masks and gateways.
MicroLogix 1100
Controllers and Ethernet
Communication
Ethernet is a local area network that provides communication
between various devices at 10 to 100 Mbps. The physical
communication media options for the MicroLogix 1100 are:
• built-in
– twisted-pair (10/100Base-T)
• with media converters or hubs
– fiber optic
– broadband
– thick-wire coaxial cable (10Base-5)
– thin-wire coaxial cable (10Base-2)
See the following page for more information on Ethernet physical
media.
219
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
220
Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface
The MicroLogix 1100 supports Ethernet communication via the
Ethernet communication channel 1 shown in the drawing below.
Side View
Channel 1
Ethernet
(10/100Base-T)
Channel 0
RS-232/485
(DH485, DF1, or ASCII)
MicroLogix 1100
Performance
Considerations
Actual performance of an MicroLogix 1100 controller varies according
to:
•
•
•
•
size of Ethernet messages.
frequency of Ethernet messages.
network loading.
the implementation of and performance of your processor
application program.
Optimal Performance: RSLinx to MicroLogix 1100 Series A OS FRN3
controller(2-node Ethernet network)
Operation
Words MSG per Second
Words per Second
Single Typed Read
1
20
20
Single Typed Reads
20
20
400
Single Typed Reads
100
20
2000
Optimal Performance: MicroLogix 1100 FRN3 to MicroLogix 1100 Series A OS FRN3
controller(2-node Ethernet network)
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Operation
Words MSG per Second
Words per Second
Single Typed Read
1
11
11
Single Typed Reads
20
11
220
Single Typed Reads
100
11
1,100
Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface
221
Optimal Performance: RSLinx to MicroLogix 1100 Series B OS FRN4 controller
Operation
Words MSG per Second
Words per Second
Single Typed Read
1
50
50
Single Typed Reads
20
50
2,500
Single Typed Reads
100
50
5,000
Optimal Performance: MicroLogix 1100 Series A OS FRN3 to MicroLogix 1100
Series B OS FRN4 controller
Operation
Words MSG per Second
Words per Second
Single Typed Read
1
18
18
Single Typed Reads
20
18
360
Single Typed Reads
100
18
1,800
Optimal Performance: MicroLogix 1100 Series B OS FRN4 to MicroLogix 1100
Series B OS FRN4 controller
MicroLogix 1100 and PC
Connections to the
Ethernet Network
Operation
Words MSG per Second
Words per Second
Single Typed Read
1
20
20
Single Typed Reads
20
20
400
Single Typed Reads
100
20
2,000
The MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet connector conforms to ISO/IEC 8802-3
STD 802.3 and utilizes 10/100Base-T media. Connections are made
directly from the MicroLogix 1100 to an Ethernet hub or switch. The
network setup is simple and cost effective. Typical network topology
is pictured below.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
222
Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface
Ethernet Network Topology
Ethernet Hub or
Switch
to PC Ethernet Card
IMPORTANT
RJ45 connectors on both ends
of cable (10/100Base-T)
to MicroLogix 1100
Channel 1
The MicroLogix 1100 controller contains a
10/100Base-T, RJ45 Ethernet connector which
connects to standard Ethernet hubs or switchs via
8-wire twisted-pair straight-through cable. To access
other Ethernet mediums, use 10/100Base-T media
converters or Ethernet hubs or switchs that can be
connected together via fiber, thin-wire, or thick-wire
coaxial cables, or any other physical media
commercially available with Ethernet hubs or switchs.
Connecting an Ethernet switch on the Ethernet Network
The MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet port supports the following Ethernet
settings:
• 10 Mbps half duplex or full duplex
• 100 Mbps half duplex or full duplex
Mode selection can be automatic, based on the IEEE 802.3 auto
negotiation protocol. In most cases, using the auto negotiation
function results in proper operation between a switch port and
MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet port.
With RSLogix500 programming software version 7.00.00 or later, you
can manually set the communication rate and duplex mode of an
Ethernet port you have connected to the switch port. The settings of
the Ethernet port and the switch port must match.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface
IMPORTANT
223
When connecting the MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet port
to a 10/100Base-T Ethernet switch, note the
following recommendations:
• Use the auto negotiation function for both the switch port and the
MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet port
• If you want to force to a specific speed/duplex mode, you should
force the MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet port and leave the switch in
auto negotiation mode to match speed/duplex settings of the
MicroLogix 1100. Ethernet port.
• If you want to disable the auto negotiation function for both
ports, then you should only force both the switch and the
MicroLogix 1100 port to either 100Mbps Half-duplex or 10
Mbps/Half-duplex.
If you attempt to force both the switch and the MicroLogix1100
port to either 100 Mbps Full-duplex or 10 Mbps Full-duplex, the
Ethernet link will not be established and Ethernet
communications will not work.
Cables
Shielded and non-shielded twisted-pair 10/100Base-T cables with RJ45
connectors are supported. The maximum cable length between an
MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet port and a 10/100Base-T port on an
Ethernet hub or switch (without repeaters or fiber) is 100 m (323 ft).
However, in an industrial application, cable length should be kept to a
minimum.
The Ethernet cabling with straight-through method is
recommended as below. Do not make the incorrect
connection.
TIP
Straight-through cabling
Pin
Pin Name
Cable color
1
Tx+
Orange/White
2
Tx-
Orange
3
Rx+
Green/White
4
No used by 10/100Base-T
Blue
5
No used by 10/100Base-T
Blue/White
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
224
Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface
6
Rx-
Green
7
No used by 10/100Base-T
Brown/White
8
No used by 10/100Base-T
Brown
The standard Ethernet cable is terminated in accordance with EIA/TIA
568B on both ends. The crossover cable is terminated to EIA/TIA 568B
at one end and EIA/TIA 568A at the other, exactly as shown in the
two color coded plugs below.
The following figures show how the TIA/EIA 568A and 568B are to be
terminated. There are four pairs of wires contained in a CAT5 UTP
cable. These pairs of cables are color coded white blue/blue, white
orange/orange, white green/green, white brown/brown, they are also
numbered one to four in the order shown.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface
TIP
225
The most common wiring for RJ45 cables is the
"straight through" cable which means that pin 1 of
the plug on one end is connected to pin 1 of the
plug on the other end. The straight through RJ45
cable is commonly used to connect network cards
with hubs on 10Base-T and 100Base-Tx networks.
On network cards, pair 1-2 is the transmitter, and
pair 3-6 is the receiver. The other two pairs are not
used. On hubs pair 1-2 is the receiver and 3-6 the
transmitter. It may be best to wire your cables with
the same color sequence. In this cable layout, all
pins are wired one-to-one to the other side. The pins
on the RJ45 connector are assigned in pairs, and
every pair carries one differential signal. Each line
pair has to be twisted.
In small network where only two computers have to
be connected, a "cross over" RJ45 cable is necessary,
where the transmit and receive lines on both RJ45
connectors are cross connected. The color coding for
the cross over RJ45 cable have been defined in the
EIA/TIA 568A standard. In a cross-over cable layout,
you should remember that one end is normal, and
the other end has the cross-over configuration.
Ethernet Connections
TCP/IP is the mechanism used to transport Ethernet messages. On top
of TCP, Ethernet/IP protocol is required to establish sessions and to
send the MSG commands. Connections can be initiated by either a
client program (RSLinx application) or a processor.
The client program or processor must first establish a connection to
the MicroLogix 1100 to enable the MicroLogix 1100 to receive solicited
messages from a client program or another processor.
In order to send an outgoing message, the MicroLogix 1100 must first
establish a connection with the destination node at a specified IP
address on the Ethernet network. A connection is established when a
MSG instruction executes and no previous connection exists.
When a MSG instruction executes, the MicroLogix 1100 checks to see
whether a connection has been established with the destination node.
If a connection has not been established, the MicroLogix 1100
attempts to establish a connection of the peer type.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
226
Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface
In order to receive messages from another device on Ethernet, an
“incoming” connection must be established. This incoming connection
is made by the sending processor and uses one incoming connection
in the receiving processor.
The MicroLogix 1100 supports a maximum of 32 connections,
allowing a maximum of 16 outgoing and a maximum of 16 incoming
simultaneous connections with up to 32 other devices or applications.
The connections are dedicated as follows:
Number of Connections(1)
Dedicated to:
16
outgoing connections
16
incoming connections
(1)
Connections established by an INTERCHANGE client, RSLinx client, and peers are all included when
counting the number of connections.
IMPORTANT
Duplicate IP address
Detection
For outgoing connections, no more that one
connection per destination node is established. If
multiple MSG instructions use the same destination
node, they share the same connection.
The MicroLogix 1100 Series B firmware support duplicate IP address
detection.
When you change the IP address or connect one of the MicroLogix to
an EtherNet/IP network, the MicroLogix 1100 controller checks to
make sure that the IP address assigned to this device does not match
the address of any other network device. The MicroLogix 1100 will
check every 2 minutes for a duplicate IP address on the network. If
the MicroLogix 1100 determines that there is a conflict (another device
on the network with a matching IP address), the following message
gets posted on the LCD display.
To correct this conflict, use the instructions in this chapter to change
the IP address of the Ethernet/IP device. Then cycle power to the
device or reset the device (such as disconnecting the ethernet cable
and reconnecting the cable).
There is also the possibility that two Ethernet/IP device can detect a
conflict simultaneously. If this occurs, remove the device with the
incorrect IP address or correct its conflict. To get the second device
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface
227
out of conflict mode, cycle power to the module or disconnect its
ethernet cable and reconnect the cable. The MicroLogix 1100 will
check every 2 minutes for a duplicate IP address on the network.
Configuring the Ethernet
Channel on the MicroLogix
1100
There are two ways to configure the MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet
channel 1.
• via a BOOTP or DHCP request at controller powerup
• manually setting the configuration parameters using RSLogix 500
Programming Software
The configuration parameters are shown on the following page, and
the configuration procedures follow.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
228
Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface
Parameter
Description
Default
Status
Hardware
Address
The MicroLogix 1100 Ethernet hardware address.
Ethernet
hardware
address
read only
IP Address
The MicroLogix 1100 internet address (in network byte order). The internet address
must be specified to connect to the TCP/IP network.
0 (undefined)
read/write
Subnet Mask
The MicroLogix 1100 subnet mask (in network byte order). The Subnet Mask is used to
interpret IP addresses when the internet is divided into subnets. A Subnet Mask of all
zeros indicates that no subnet mask has been configured.
0 (undefined)
read/write
Gateway
Address
The address of a gateway (in network byte order) that provides connection to another IP
network. A Gateway Address of all zeros indicates that no gateway has been
configured.
0 (undefined)
read/write
Default
Domain Name
The default domain name can have the following formats:
’a.b.c’, ’a.b’ or ’a’, where a, b, c must start with a letter, end with a letter or digit, and
have as interior characters only letters, digits or hyphens. Maximum length is 63
characters.
NULL
read/write
Primary Name
Server
This is the IP address of the computer acting as the local Ethernet network Primary
Domain Name System (DNS) server.
0 (undefined) read/write
Secondary
Name Server
This is the IP address of the computer acting as the local Ethernet network Secondary
Domain Name System (DNS) server.
0 (undefined)
BOOTP Enable
1 (enabled)
The BOOTP enable switch. When BOOTP is enabled, the MicroLogix 1100 attempts to
learn its network related parameters at powerup via a BOOTP request. There must be a
BOOTP server on the network capable of responding to this BOOTP request. When both
BOOTP and DHCP are disabled, the MicroLogix 1100 uses the locally configured network
related parameters (IP Address, Subnet Mask, Broadcast Address, etc.).
read/write
DHCP Enable
The DHCP auto configuration enable switch. When DHCP is enabled, a DHCP server
automatically assigns network related parameters to the MicroLogix 1100 when it logs
into a TCP/IP network. There must be a DHCP server on the network capable of
allocating network addresses and configuring parameters to newly attached device.
When both BOOTP and DHCP are disabled, the MicroLogix 1100 uses the locally
configured network related parameters (IP Address, Subnet Mask, Broadcast Address,
etc.).
0 (disabled)
read/write
SNMP Server
Enable
SNMP enable switch. Check this to enable SNMP (Simple Network Management
Protocol). Not applicable to the MicroLogix 1100.
0 (disabled)
read/write
SMTP Client
Enable (Series
B only)
The SMTP Client service enable switch. When SMTP is enabled, MicroLogix 1100 is
capable of transmitting e-mail messages generated by a 485CIF write message with a
string element. There must be a SMTP server on the network capable of processing
e-mail service. This provides an extremely versatile mechanism to report alarms, status,
and other data-related functions.
0 (disabled)
read/write
Auto Negotiate When Auto Negotiate is disabled (unchecked), the Ethernet speed/duplex is forced to
either 10 Mbps/Half-duplex, 10 Mbps/Full-duplex, 100 Mbps/Half-duplex, or 100
and Port
Mbps/Full-duplex, as selected in the Port Setting field.
Setting
When Auto Negotiate is enabled (checked), the Port Setting Field allows you to select
the range of speed/duplex settings that the MicroLogix 1100 will negotiate.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
(undefined)
read/write
read/write
Auto
Negotiate
enabled and
Port Setting.
10/100 Mbps
Full
Duplex/Half
Duplex
Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface
Parameter
Description
Default
MSG
Connection
Timeout
The amount of time (in ms) allowed for a MSG instruction to establish a connection with 15,000 ms
the destination node. The MSG Connection Timeout has 250 ms resolution and a range
from 250 to 65,500.
MSG Reply
Timeout
The amount of time (in ms) that the MicroLogix 1100 will wait for a reply to a command
that it has initiated via a MSG instruction. The MSG Reply Timeout has 250 ms
resolution and a range from 250 to 65,500.
3,000 ms
read/write
Inactivity
Timeout
(Series B only)
The amount of time (in minutes) that a MSG connection may remain inactive before it is
terminated. The Inactivity Timeout has a 1 minute resolution and a range from 1 to
65,500 minutes.
30 minutes.
read/write
229
Status
read/write
Configuration Using
RSLogix 500 Programming
Software
Refer to the online documentation provided with your programming
software.
Configuration Via BOOTP
BOOTP (bootstrap protocol) is a low-level protocol that TCP/IP nodes
use to obtain start-up information. By default, the MicroLogix 1100
broadcasts BOOTP requests at powerup. The BOOTP Valid parameter
remains clear until a BOOTP reply has been received. BOOTP lets
you dynamically assign IP Addresses to processors on the Ethernet
Link.
To use BOOTP, a BOOTP Server must exist on the local Ethernet
subnet. The server is a computer that has BOOTP Server software
installed and reads a text file containing network information for
individual nodes on the network.
The host system’s BOOTP configuration file must be updated to
service requests from MicroLogix 1100 controllers. The following
parameters must be configured:
Parameter
Description
IP Address
A unique IP Address for the MicroLogix 1100 controller.
Subnet Mask
Specifies the net and local subnet mask as per the standard on subnetting
RFC 950, Internet Standard Subnetting Procedure.
Gateway
Specifies the IP address of a gateway on the same subnet as the
MicroLogix 1100 that provides connections to another IP network.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
230
Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface
TIP
You can use any commercially available BOOTP
server. If you do not have BOOTP Server capabilities
on your network, and you want to dynamically
configure Channel 1, you can download the free
Rockwell Automation BOOTP server from the
Rockwell Automation website. Go to
www.ab.com/networks/bootp/index.html
When BOOTP is enabled, the following events occur at power-up:
• The processor broadcasts a BOOTP-request message containing
its hardware address over the local network or subnet.
• The BOOTP server compares the hardware address with the
addresses in its look-up table.
• The BOOTP server sends a message back to the processor with
the IP address and other network information that corresponds
to the hardware address it received.
With all hardware and IP addresses in one location, you can easily
change IP addresses in the BOOTP configuration file if your network
needs to be changed.
The BOOTP request can be disabled by clearing the BOOTP Enable
parameter in the channel configuration file. When both BOOTP
Enable and DHCP are cleared (disabled), the MicroLogix 1100 uses
the existing channel configuration data.
IMPORTANT
If BOOTP is disabled, or no BOOTP server exists on
the network, you must use RSLogix 500 programming
software to enter/change the IP address for each
processor or you must use DHCP instead of it.
Using the Rockwell BOOTP/DHCP Utility
The Rockwell BOOTP/DHCP server utility is a standalone program
that incorporates the functionality of standard BOOTP software with a
user-friendly graphical interface. It is located in the Utils directory on
the RSLogix 500 installation CD.
The newest version of the utility can be downloaded from
www.ab.com/networks/bootp/index.html. The device must have
BOOTP enabled (factory default) or DHCP enabled to use the utility.
To configure your device using the BOOTP utility, perform the
following steps.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface
231
1. Run the BOOTP/DHCP server utility software. It will ask you to
configure your network settings before using the BOOTP/DHCP
server tool. Enter your Ethernet settings for Subnet Mask and
Gateway. If you are not sure about it, get a help from your
system administrator. Just leave Primary DNS, Secondary DNS,
and Domain Name (If corresponding information is allocated to
the PC where BOOTP/DHCP server utility is installed, enter the
same information.)
2. In the Request History panel you will see the hardware
addresses of devices issuing BOOTP or DHCP requests.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
232
Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface
3. Double-click on the hardware address of the device you want to
configure. You will see the New Entry pop-up window with the
device's Ethernet Address (MAC).
4. Enter the IP Address and Description you want to assign to
the device, and click OK. Leave Hostname blank.
The device will be added to the Relation List, displaying the
Ethernet Address (MAC) and corresponding IP Address, Subnet
Mask, and Gateway (if applicable).
Using a DHCP Server To
Configure Your Processor
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
A DHCP server automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations
logging onto a TCP/IP network. DHCP is based on BOOTP and
maintains some backward compatibility. The main difference is that
BOOTP was designed for manual configuration, while DHCP allows
Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface
233
for dynamic allocation of network addresses and configurations to
newly attached devices.
ATTENTION
Using Subnet Masks and
Gateways
The processor must be assigned a fixed network
address. The IP address of the processor must not be
dynamically provided. Failure to observe this
precaution may result in unintended machine
motion or loss of process control.
Configure subnet masks and gateways using the Ethernet channel 1
configuration screen.
IMPORTANT
If BOOTP is enabled, you can’t change any of the
advanced Ethernet communications characteristics.
If your network is divided into subnetworks that use gateways or
routers, you must indicate the following information when configuring
channel 1:
• subnet mask
• gateway address
A subnet mask is a filter that a node applies to IP addresses to
determine if an address is on the local subnet or on another subnet. If
an address is located on another subnetwork, messages are routed
through a local gateway to be transferred to the destination
subnetwork.
If your network is not divided into subnets, then leave the subnet
mask field at the default.
If you are
Then
manually configuring channel 1
and have a network with subnets
• be sure the BOOTP enable field is disabled
• use your programming software to enter the
subnet mask and gateway address.
using BOOTP to configure channel • be sure BOOTP is enabled
1 and have a network with
• include the subnet mask(s) and gateway
subnets
address(es)
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
234
Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface
Manually Configuring Channel 1 for Controllers on
Subnets
If you are manually configuring channel 1 for a MicroLogix 1100
controller located on a subnet, deselect both of the “BOOTP Enable”
and “DHCP Enable” options by clicking on the checked box, as
shown in the figure below.
See the table below to configure the subnet mask and gateway
address fields for each controller via your programming software.
This field:
Specifies:
Configure by doing the following:
Subnet Mask
The controller’s subnet mask.
Enter an address of the following form:
The subnet mask is used to interpret IP
addresses when the internet is divided
into subnets.
a.b.c.d Where: a, b, c, d are between 0...255 (decimal)
Gateway Address The IP address of the gateway that
provides a connection to another IP
network.
This field is required when you
communicate with other devices not on a
local subnet.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
If your network is not divided into subnets, then leave the subnet mask
field at the default. If you change the default and need to reset it, type
0.0.0.0.
Enter an address of the following form:
a.b.c.d Where: a, b, c, d are between 0...255 (decimal)
The default address is No Gateway.
Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface
MicroLogix 1100 Embedded
Web Server Capability
235
MicroLogix 1100 controllers include not only the embedded web
server which allows viewing of module information, TCP/IP
configuration, and diagnostic information, but the capabilities that also
allow viewing of the data file via Ethernet using a standard web
browser.
For more information on MicroLogix 1100 embedded web server
capability, refer to the MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers
Embedded Web Server User Manual, publication 1763-UM002.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
236
Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface
Notes:
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Appendix
G
System Loading and Heat Dissipation
TIP
at
System Loading
Calculations
A maximum of four 1762 I/O modules, in any
combination, can be connected to a MicroLogix 1100
controller. You can use this appendix to determine the
power supply load and heat dissipation for your
system.
The MicroLogix 1100 controller is designed to support up to any four
1762 expansion I/O modules.
When you connect MicroLogix accessories and expansion I/O, an
electrical load is placed on the controller power supply. This section
shows how to calculate the load of your control system.
The following example is provided to illustrate system loading
calculation. The system calculation procedure accounts for the amount
of 5V dc and 24V dc current consumed by controller, expansion I/O,
and user-supplied equipment. Use the System Loading Worksheet on
page G-240 to calculate your controller configuration.
237
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
238
System Loading and Heat Dissipation
System Loading Example Calculations
Current Loading
Calculating the Current for Expansion I/O
n
A
Number of
Modules
Device Current Requirements
(max)
Calculated Current
at 5V dc (mA)
at 24V dc (mA)
at 5V dc (mA)
at 24V dc (mA)
50
0
100
0
1762-IF4
40
50
1762-IF2OF2
40
105
1762-IQ8
50
0
1762-IQ16
60
0
1762-IR4
40
50
1762-IT4
40
50
1762-OA8
115
0
1762-OB8
115
0
1762-OB16
175
0
1762-OF4
40
165
80
90
160
180
1762-OW16
120
140
1762-OX6I
110
110
1762-IQ8OW6
110
80
260
180
Catalog Number(1)
1762-IA8
1762-OW8
Total Modules (4 maximum):
2
2
4
B
Subtotal:
(1) Refer to your expansion I/O Installation Instructions for Current Requirements not listed in this table.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
nxA
nxB
System Loading and Heat Dissipation
239
Validating the System
The example systems shown in the tables below are verified to be
acceptable configurations. The systems are valid because:
• Calculated Current Values < Maximum Allowable Current
Values
• Calculated System Loading < Maximum Allowable System
Loading
Validating Systems using 1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BBB, or 1763-L16DWD
Maximum Allowable Values
Calculated Values
Current:
Current (Subtotal from Table on page 238.):
800 mA at 5V dc
700 mA at 24V dc
System Loading:
0 mA + 260 mA = 260 mA at 5V dc
120 mA + 180 mA = 300 mA at 24V dc
System Loading:
= (260 mA x 5V) + (300 mA x 24V)
= (1,300 mW) + (7,200 mW)
= 8,500 mW
20.8 W
= 8.50 W
Validating Systems using 1763-L16BWA
Maximum Allowable Values
Calculated Values
Current for Devices Connected to the +24V dc
Sensor Supply:
Sum of all sensor currents
200 mA at 24V dc
140 mA at 24V dc (example sensor value)
Current for MicroLogix Accessories and
Expansion I/O:
Current Values (Subtotal from Table ):
800 mA at 5V dc
0 mA + 260 mA = 260 mA at 5V dc
System Loading:
700 mA at 24V dc
120 mA + 180 mA = 300 mA at 24V dc
System Loading:
= (140 mA x 24V) + (260 mA x 5V) + (300 mA x 24V)
= (3,360 mW) + (1,300 mW) + (7,200 mW)
= 11,860 mW
16.4 W
= 11.9 W
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
240
System Loading and Heat Dissipation
System Loading Worksheet
The tables below are provided for system loading validation. See
System Loading Example Calculations on page G-238.
Current Loading
Calculating the Current for Expansion I/O
n
A
Number of
Modules
Device Current Requirements
Calculated Current
at 5V dc (mA)
at 24V dc (mA)
at 5V dc (mA)
1762-IA8
50
0
1762-IF4
40
50
1762-IF2OF2
40
105
1762-IQ8
50
0
1762-IQ16
60
0
1762-IR4
40
50
1762-IT4
40
50
1762-OA8
115
0
1762-OB8
115
0
1762-OB16
175
0
1762-OF4
40
165
1762-OW8
80
90
1762-OW16
120
140
1762-OX6I
110
110
1762-IQ8OW6
110
80
Total Modules (4 maximum):
Subtotal:
Catalog Number(1)
B
(1) Refer to your expansion I/O Installation Instructions for Current Requirements not listed in this table.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
nxA
nxB
at 24V dc (mA)
System Loading and Heat Dissipation
241
Validating Systems using 1763-L16AWA, 1763-L16BBB, or 1763-L16DWD
Maximum Allowable Values
Calculated Values
Current:
Current (Subtotal from Table .):
800 mA at 5V dc
700 mA at 24V dc
System Loading:
mA at 5V dc
mA at 24V dc
System Loading:
= (________ mA x 5V) + (________ mA x 24V)
= __________ mW + __________ mW
= __________ mW
20.8 W
= __________ W
Validating Systems using 1763-L16BWA
Maximum Allowable Values
Calculated Values
Current for Devices Connected to the +24V dc Sensor
Supply:
Sum of all sensor currents
200 mA at 24V dc
mA at 24V dc
Current for MicroLogix Accessories and Expansion I/O: Current (Subtotal from Table .)
800 mA at 5V dc
System Loading:
700 mA at 24V dc
mA at 5 V dc
mA at 24V dc
System Loading:
= (________ mA x 24V) + (________ mA x 5V) + (________ mA x 24V)
= __________ mW + __________ mW + __________ mW
= __________ mW
16.4 W
= __________ W
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
242
System Loading and Heat Dissipation
Calculating Heat
Dissipation
Use the following table when you need to determine the heat
dissipation of your system for installation in an enclosure. For System
Loading, take the value from the appropriate system loading
worksheets on pages 240 or 241.
Heat Dissipation
Catalog Number
Heat Dissipation
Equation or Constant
Calculation
1763-L16AWA
15.2 W + (0.4 x System Loading)
15.2 W + (0.4 x ______ W)
W
1763-L16BWA
15.7 W + (0.4 x System Loading)
15.7 W + (0.4 x ______ W)
W
1763-L16BBB
17.0 W + (0.3 x System Loading)
17.0 W + (0.3 x ______ W)
W
1763-L16DWD
17.0 W + (0.3 x System Loading)
17.0 W + (0.3 x ______ W)
W
1762-IA8
2.0 W x number of modules
2.0 W x _________
W
1762-IF4
2.0 W x number of modules
2.0 W x _________
W
1762-IF2OF2
2.6 W x number of modules
2.6 W x _________
W
1762-IQ8
3.7 W x number of modules
3.7 W x _________
W
1762-IQ16
5.3 W x number of modules
5.3 W x _________
W
1762-IR4
1.5 W x number of modules
1.5 W x _________
W
1762-IT4
1.5 W x number of modules
1.5 W x _________
W
1762-OA8
2.9 W x number of modules
2.9 W x _________
W
1762-OB8
1.6 W x number of modules
1.6 W x _________
W
1762-OB16
2.9 W x number of modules
2.9 W x _________
W
1762-OF4
3.8 W x number of modules
3.8 W x _________
W
1762-OW8
2.9 W x number of modules
2.9 W x _________
W
1762-OW16
5.6 W x number of modules
5.6 W x _________
W
1762-OX6I
2.8 W x number of modules
2.8 W x _________
W
1762-IQ8OW6
4.4 W x number of modules
4.4 W x _________
W
Add Sub-Totals to determine Heat Dissipation
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Sub-Total
W
Glossary
The following terms are used throughout this manual. Refer to the
Allen-Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary, publication AG-7.1, for
a complete guide to Allen-Bradley technical terms.
address
A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location. For
example, I:1/0 is the memory address for the data located in the Input
file location word1, bit 0.
AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter
A device that provides a communication link between various
networked devices. (Catalog Number 1761-NET-AIC.)
application
1) A machine or process monitored and controlled by a controller.
2) The use of computer- or processor-based routines for specific
purposes.
baud rate
The speed of communication between devices. All devices must
communicate at the same baud rate on a network.
bit
The smallest storage location in memory that contains either a 1 (ON)
or a 0 (OFF).
block diagrams
A schematic drawing.
Boolean operators
Logical operators such as AND, OR, NAND, NOR, NOT, and
Exclusive-OR that can be used singularly or in combination to form
logic statements or circuits. Can have an output response of T or F.
branch
A parallel logic path within a rung of a ladder program.
communication scan
A part of the controller’s operating cycle. Communication with other
devices, such as software running on a personal computer, takes
place.
243
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
244
controller
A device, such as a programmable controller, used to monitor input
devices and control output devices.
controller overhead
An internal portion of the operating cycle used for housekeeping and
set-up purposes.
control profile
The means by which a controller determines which outputs turn on
under what conditions.
counter
1) An electro-mechanical relay-type device that counts the occurrence
of some event. May be pulses developed from operations such as
switch closures or interruptions of light beams.
2) In controllers, a software counter eliminates the need for hardware
counters. The software counter can be given a preset count value to
count up or down whenever the counted event occurs.
CPU (Central Processing Unit)
The decision-making and data storage section of a programmable
controller.
data table
The part of processor memory that contains I/O values and files
where data is monitored, manipulated, and changed for control
purposes.
DIN rail
Manufactured according to Deutsche Industrie Normenausshus (DIN)
standards, a metal railing designed to ease installation and mounting
of your controller.
download
Data is transferred from a programming or storage device to another
device.
DTE (Data Terminal Equipment)
Equipment that is attached to a network to send or receive data, or
both.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
245
embedded I/O
Embedded I/O is the controller’s on-board I/O.
EMI
Electromagnetic interference.
encoder
1) A rotary device that transmits position information.
2) A device that transmits a fixed number of pulses for each
revolution.
executing mode
Any run or test mode.
expansion I/O
Expansion I/O is I/O that is connected to the controller via a bus or
cable. MicroLogix 1200 controllers use Bulletin 1762 expansion I/O.
false
The status of an instruction that does not provide a continuous logical
path on a ladder rung.
FIFO (First-In-First-Out)
The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file.
file
A collection of information organized into one group.
full-duplex
A bidirectional mode of communication where data may be
transmitted and received simultaneously (contrast with half-duplex).
half-duplex
A communication link in which data transmission is limited to one
direction at a time.
hard disk
A storage area in a personal computer that may be used to save
processor files and reports for future use.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
246
high byte
Bits 8 to 15 of a word.
input device
A device, such as a push button or a switch, that supplies signals to
the input circuits of the controller.
inrush current
The temporary surge current produced when a device or circuit is
initially energized.
instruction
A mnemonic and data address defining an operation to be performed
by the processor. A rung in a program consists of a set of input and
output instructions. The input instructions are evaluated by the
controller as being true or false. In turn, the controller sets the output
instructions to true or false.
instruction set
The set of general purpose instructions available with a given
controller.
I/O (Inputs and Outputs)
Consists of input and output devices that provide and/or receive data
from the controller.
jump
Change in normal sequence of program execution, by executing an
instruction that alters the program counter (sometimes called a
branch). In ladder programs a JUMP (JMP) instruction causes
execution to jump to a labeled rung.
ladder logic
A program written in a format resembling a ladder-like diagram. The
program is used by a programmable controller to control devices.
least significant bit (LSB)
The digit (or bit) in a binary word (code) that carries the smallest
value of weight.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
247
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
Used as status indicator for processor functions and inputs and
outputs.
LIFO (Last-In-First-Out)
The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file.
low byte
Bits 0 to 7 of a word.
logic
A process of solving complex problems through the repeated use of
simple functions that can be either true or false. General term for
digital circuits and programmed instructions to perform required
decision making and computational functions.
Master Control Relay (MCR)
A mandatory hard-wired relay that can be de-energized by any
series-connected emergency stop switch. Whenever the MCR is
de-energized, its contacts open to de-energize all application I/O
devices.
mnemonic
A simple and easy to remember term that is used to represent a
complex or lengthy set of information.
modem
Modulator/demodulator. Equipment that connects data terminal
equipment to a communication line.
modes
Selected methods of operation. Example: run, test, or program.
negative logic
The use of binary logic in such a way that “0” represents the voltage
level normally associated with logic 1 (for example, 0 = +5V, 1 = 0V).
Positive is more conventional (for example, 1 = +5V, 0 = 0V).
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
248
network
A series of stations (nodes) connected by some type of
communication medium. A network may be made up of a single link
or multiple links.
nominal input current
The current at nominal input voltage.
normally closed
Contacts on a relay or switch that are closed when the relay is
de-energized or the switch is deactivated; they are open when the
relay is energized or the switch is activated. In ladder programming, a
symbol that allows logic continuity (flow) if the referenced input is
logic “0” when evaluated.
normally open
Contacts on a relay or switch that are open when the relay is
de-energized or the switch is deactivated. (They are closed when the
relay is energized or the switch is activated.) In ladder programming, a
symbol that allows logic continuity (flow) if the referenced input is
logic “1” when evaluated.
off-delay time
The OFF delay time is a measure of the time required for the
controller logic to recognize that a signal has been removed from the
input terminal of the controller. The time is determined by circuit
component delays and by any filter adjustment applied.
offline
Describes devices not under direct communication.
offset
The steady-state deviation of a controlled variable from a fixed point.
off-state leakage current
When an ideal mechanical switch is opened (off-state) no current
flows through the switch. Practical semiconductor switches, and the
transient suppression components which are sometimes used to
protect switches, allow a small current to flow when the switch is in
the off state. This current is referred to as the off-state leakage current.
To ensure reliable operation, the off-state leakage current rating of a
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
249
switch should be less than the minimum operating current rating of
the load that is connected to the switch.
on-delay time
The ON delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller
logic to recognize that a signal has been presented at the input
terminal of the controller.
one-shot
A programming technique that sets a bit for only one program scan.
online
Describes devices under direct communication. For example, when
RSLogix 500 is monitoring the program file in a controller.
operating voltage
For inputs, the voltage range needed for the input to be in the On
state. For outputs, the allowable range of user-supplied voltage.
output device
A device, such as a pilot light or a motor starter coil, that is controlled
by the controller.
processor
A Central Processing Unit. (See CPU.)
processor file
The set of program and data files used by the controller to control
output devices. Only one processor file may be stored in the
controller at a time.
program file
The area within a processor file that contains the ladder logic
program.
program mode
When the controller is not executing the processor file and all outputs
are de-energized.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
250
program scan
A part of the controller’s operating cycle. During the scan the ladder
program is executed and the output data file is updated based on the
program and the input data file.
programming device
Executable programming package used to develop ladder diagrams.
protocol
The packaging of information that is transmitted across a network.
read
To acquire data from a storage place. For example, the processor
READs information from the input data file to solve the ladder
program.
relay
An electrically operated device that mechanically switches electrical
circuits.
relay logic
A representation of the program or other logic in a form normally
used for relays.
restore
To download (transfer) a program from a personal computer to a
controller.
reserved bit
A status file location that the user should not read or write to.
retentive data
Information associated with data files (timers, counters, inputs, and
outputs) in a program that is preserved through power cycles.
RS-232
An EIA standard that specifies electrical, mechanical, and functional
characteristics for serial binary communication circuits. A single-ended
serial communication interface.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
251
run mode
This is an executing mode during which the controller scans or
executes the ladder program, monitors input devices, energizes output
devices, and acts on enabled I/O forces.
rung
Ladder logic is comprised of a set of rungs. A rung contains input and
output instructions. During Run mode, the inputs on a rung are
evaluated to be true or false. If a path of true logic exists, the outputs
are made true. If all paths are false, the outputs are made false.
save
To upload (transfer) a program stored in memory from a controller to
a personal computer; OR to save a program to a computer hard disk.
scan time
The time required for the controller to execute the instructions in the
program. The scan time may vary depending on the instructions and
each instruction’s status during the scan.
sinking
A term used to describe current flow between an I/O device and
controller I/O circuit — typically, a sinking device or circuit provides a
path to ground, low, or negative side of power supply.
sourcing
A term used to describe current flow between an I/O device and
controller I/O circuit — typically, a sourcing device or circuit provides
a path to the source, high, or positive side of power supply.
status
The condition of a circuit or system, represented as logic 0 (OFF) or 1
(ON).
terminal
A point on an I/O module that external I/O devices, such as a push
button or pilot light, are wired to.
throughput
The time between when an input turns on and the corresponding
output turns on.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
252
true
The status of an instruction that provides a continuous logical path on
a ladder rung.
upload
Data is transferred to a programming or storage device from another
device.
watchdog timer
A timer that monitors a cyclical process and is cleared at the
conclusion of each cycle. If the watchdog runs past its programmed
time period, it causes a fault.
workspace
The main storage available for programs and data and allocated for
working storage.
write
To copy data to a storage device. For example, the processor WRITEs
the information from the output data file to the output modules.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Index
Numerics
1762-24AWA wiring diagram 3-52
1762-IA8 wiring diagram 3-58
1762-IF2OF2
input type selection 3-63
output type selection 3-63
terminal block layout 3-65
wiring 3-65
1762-IF4
input type selection 3-66
terminal block layout 3-67
1762-IQ16 wiring diagram 3-59
1762-IQ8 wiring diagram 3-58
1762-OA8 wiring diagram 3-59
1762-OB16 wiring diagram 3-60
1762-OB8 wiring diagram 3-60
1762-OW16 wiring diagram 3-61
1762-OW8 wiring diagram 3-61
1762-OX6I wiring diagram 3-62
5/05 processors
Ethernet communications F-219
A
address G-243
Advanced Interface Converter. See AIC+
agency certifications 2-19
AIC+
applying power to 4-95
attaching to the network 4-94
connecting 4-88
definition G-243
installing 4-94
recommended user supplied components 4-92
safety consideration 4-94
selecting cable 4-91
analog channel wiring guidelines 3-55
analog expansion I/O C-194
diagnostics C-194
module operation vs. channel operation C-194
power-up diagnostics C-194
system wiring guidelines 3-63
troubleshooting C-194
analog inputs
analog channel wiring guidelines 3-55
application G-243
B
battery 6-144
processor battery life expectancy B-184
processor replacement battery B-184
baud rate G-243
253
bit G-243
block diagrams G-243
Boolean operators G-243
BOOTP
configuring SLC 5/05 F-229–F-232
using the Rockwell Utility F-230
branch G-243
Buttons 5-106
C
cable pinout
MicroLogix 1100 Channel 0 to modem cable 4-79, 4-88
cables
planning routes for DH485 connections E-211
selection guide for the AIC+ 4-91
selection guide for the DeviceNet network 4-97
calling for assistance C-198
CE mark 2-19, 2-20
common mode rejection ratio
specification A-178
common techniques used in this manual P-10
communication
DeviceNet 4-97, 4-98
Ethernet 4-98
communication connections 4-71
communication options 1-16
communication protocols
DF1 Full-Duplex E-203
DF1 Half-Duplex E-204
DH485 E-209
Ethernet F-219
Modbus E-217
communication scan G-243
communications toggle push button
using 4-72
component descriptions 1-12
1762 expansion I/O 1-13
communication cables 1-14
memory module 1-12
real-time clock 1-12
configuration errors C-196
connecting expansion I/O 2-40
connecting the system
AIC+ 4-88, 4-94
DeviceNet network 4-97, 4-98
DF1 Full-Duplex protocol 4-77
DF1 isolated point-to-point connection 4-78
DH485 network 4-83
connecting to DF1 Half-Duplex network 4-80
contactors (bulletin 100), surge suppressors for 3-47
control profile G-244
ControlFlash
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
254
missing/corrupt OS LED pattern D-201
sequence of operation D-200
using D-199
controller G-244
grounding 3-48
I/O wiring 3-55
installation 2-19
LED status error conditions C-191
LED status normal operation C-191
minimizing electrical noise 3-55
mounting 2-35
mounting dimensions 2-34
mounting on DIN rail 2-36
mounting on panel 2-37
preventing excessive heat 2-26
status indicators C-189
controller overhead G-244
controller spacing 2-34
counter G-244
CPU (Central Processing Unit) G-244
Cursor display 5-107
D
data table G-244
default communication configuration 4-72
DeviceNet Communications 4-97, 4-98
DeviceNet network
connecting 4-97, 4-98
selecting cable 4-97
DF1 Full-Duplex protocol
connecting 4-77, 4-78
description E-203
example system configuration E-204
using a modem 4-78, E-207
DF1 Half-Duplex protocol
description E-204
DH485 communication protocol
configuration parameters 4-83, E-209
DH485 network
configuration parameters E-212
connecting 4-83
devices that use the network E-210
example system configuration E-215
installation 4-85
planning considerations E-210
DIN rail G-244
disconnecting main power 2-22
download G-244
DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) G-244
E
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
Electronics Industries Association (EIA) E-203
EMC Directive 2-20
EMI G-245
encoder G-245
error recovery model C-193
errors
configuration C-196
critical C-195
extended error information field C-196
hardware C-196
module error field C-196
non-critical C-195
Ethernet
advanced functions F-233
messaging F-220
processor performance F-220
using the SLC 5/05 processors F-219
European Union Directive compliance 2-19
EMC Directive 2-20
low voltage directive 2-20
executing mode G-245
expansion I/O
1762-IF2OF2 input type selection 3-63
1762-IF2OF2 output type selection 3-63
expansion I/O mounting 2-38, 2-39
mounting on DIN rail 2-38
expansion I/O wiring 3-58
1762-IA8 wiring diagram 3-58
1762-IF2OF2 wiring 3-65
1762-IF4 terminal block layout 3-67
1762-IQ16 wiring diagram 3-59
1762-IQ8 wiring diagram 3-58
1762-OA8 wiring diagram 3-59
1762-OB16 wiring diagram 3-60
1762-OB8 wiring diagram 3-60
1762-OW16 wiring diagram 3-61
1762-OW8 wiring diagram 3-61
1762-OX6I wiring diagram 3-62
analog wiring guidelines 3-63
extended error information field C-196
F
false G-245
FIFO (First-In-First-Out) G-245
file G-245
Full-Duplex 4-78
full-duplex G-245
G
general considerations 2-20
255
grounding the controller 3-48
H
Half-Duplex 4-81, G-245
hard disk G-245
hardware errors C-196
hardware features 1-11
heat dissipation
calculating G-242
heat protection 2-26
high byte G-246
I
I/O (Inputs and Outputs) G-246
input device G-246
input states on power down 2-25
inrush current G-246
installing
ControlFlash software D-199
memory module 2-31
your controller 2-19
instruction G-246
instruction set G-246
isolated link coupler
installing 4-85
isolation transformers
power considerations 2-24
J
jump G-246
L
ladder logic G-246
least significant bit (LSB) G-246
LED (Light Emitting Diode) G-247
LIFO (Last-In-First-Out) G-247
lithium battery (1747-BA)
disposing B-187
handling B-185
installing B-184
manufacturer B-187
storing B-185
transporting B-185
logic G-247
low byte G-247
M
manuals
related P-10
master control relay 2-27
emergency-stop switches 2-28
using ANSI/CSA symbols schematic 2-30
using IEC symbols schematic 2-29
Master Control Relay (MCR) G-247
master control relay circuit
periodic tests 2-23
memory module
data file protection 6-146
operation 6-145
program compare 6-145
program/data/recipe backup 6-145
removal/installation under power 6-146
write protection 6-146
Menu structure 5-102
minimizing electrical noise 3-55
mnemonic G-247
Modbus communication protocol E-217
modem G-247
modems
using with MicroLogix controllers E-207
modes G-247
module error field C-196
motor starters (bulletin 509)
surge suppressors 3-47
motor starters (bulletin 709)
surge suppressors 3-47
N
negative logic G-247
network G-248
nominal input current G-248
normally closed G-248
normally open G-248
O
offline G-248
Offline Editing 7-150
offset G-248
off-state leakage current G-248
one-shot G-249
online G-249
Online Editing 7-149
Terms 7-150
Operating buttons 5-106
operating voltage G-249
output device G-249
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
256
P
performance
Ethernet processor F-220
planning considerations for a network E-210
power considerations
input states on power down 2-25
isolation transformers 2-24
loss of power source 2-24
other line conditions 2-25
overview 2-24
power supply inrush 2-24
power distribution 2-23
power source
loss of 2-24
power supply inrush
power considerations 2-24
preparing for upgrade D-199
preventing excessive heat 2-26
processor G-249
processor file G-249
program file G-249
program mode G-249
program scan G-250
programming 1-14
programming device G-250
protocol G-250
publications
related P-10
purpose of this manual P-9
R
read G-250
real-time clock
battery operation 6-144
operation 6-143
removal/installation under power 6-143
writing data 6-144
related documentation P-10
related publications P-10
relay G-250
relay logic G-250
relays
surge suppressors for 3-47
remote packet support E-213
replacement battery B-184
disposing B-187
handling B-185
installing B-184
storing B-185
transporting B-185
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
replacement kits B-183
replacement parts B-183
reserved bit G-250
restore G-250
retentive data G-250
RS-232 G-250
RS-232 communication interface E-203
run mode G-251
rung G-251
S
safety circuits 2-23
safety considerations 2-21
disconnecting main power 2-22
hazardous location 2-21
master control relay circuit
periodic tests 2-23
periodic tests of master control relay circuit 2-23
power distribution 2-23
safety circuits 2-23
save G-251
scan time G-251
sinking G-251
sinking and sourcing wiring diagrams 3-52
sinking wiring diagram
1762-24BWA 3-52
sourcing G-251
sourcing wiring diagram
1762-24BWA 3-53, 3-54
specifications A-159
status G-251
surge suppressors
for contactor 3-47
for motor starters 3-47
for relays 3-47
recommended 3-47
using 3-45
system configuration
DF1 Full-Duplex examples E-204
DH485 connection examples E-215
system loading
example calculations G-238
limitations G-237
worksheet G-240
system loading and heat dissipation G-237
T
terminal G-251
terminal block layouts
1762-IF2OF2 3-65
257
1762-IF4 3-67
controllers 3-49
terminal groupings 3-51
terminal groupings 3-51
throughput G-251
Trim Pot Information Function File 5-136
trim pot operation 5-136
trim pots 5-136
changing values 5-136
error conditions 5-138
location 5-136
troubleshooting C-189
true G-252
U
upload G-252
using communications toggle functionality 4-72
using communications toggle push button 4-72
using emergency-stop switches 2-28
using memory modules 6-143
using real-time clock 6-143
using trim pots 5-136
W
wiring diagram
1762-IA8 3-58
1762-IF2OF2 differential sensor 3-65
1762-IF2OF2 single-ended sensor 3-66
1762-IQ16 3-59
1762-IQ8 3-58
1762-L24BXB output 3-54
1762-OA8 3-59
1762-OB16 3-60
1762-OB8 3-60
1762-OW16 3-61
1762-OW8 3-61
1762-OX6I 3-62
1763-L16AWAE input 3-52
1763-L16AWAE output 3-54
1763-L16BBBE sinking 3-53
1763-L16BBBE sourcing 3-53
1763-L16BWAE output 3-54
1763-L16BWAE sinking 3-53
1763-L16BWAE sourcing 3-53
terminal block layouts 3-49, 3-65, 3-67
wiring diagrams 3-49
wiring recommendation 3-43
wiring your controller 3-43
workspace G-252
write G-252
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
258
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007
How Are We Doing?
Your comments on our technical publications will help us serve you better in the future.
Thank you for taking the time to provide us feedback.
You can complete this form and mail (or fax) it back to us or email us at
[email protected]
Pub. Title/Type MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers
Cat. No.
Bulletin 1763
Controllers and 1762
Expansion I/O
Pub. No.
1763-UM001B-EN-P
Pub. Date April 2007
Part No.
40072-125-01(2)
Please complete the sections below. Where applicable, rank the feature (1=needs improvement, 2=satisfactory, and 3=outstanding).
Overall Usefulness
Completeness
(all necessary information
is provided)
Technical Accuracy
(all provided information
is correct)
1
2
3
How can we make this publication more useful for you?
1
2
3
Can we add more information to help you?
1
Clarity
1
(all provided information is
easy to understand)
2
3
procedure/step
illustration
feature
example
guideline
other
explanation
definition
Can we be more accurate?
text
2
Other Comments
3
illustration
How can we make things clearer?
You can add additional comments on the back of this form.
Your Name
Your Title/Function
Location/Phone
Would you like us to contact you regarding your comments?
___No, there is no need to contact me
___Yes, please call me
___Yes, please email me at _______________________
___Yes, please contact me via _____________________
Return this form to:
Rockwell Automation Technical Communications, 1 Allen-Bradley Dr., Mayfield Hts., OH 44124-9705
Fax: 440-646-3525
Publication CIG-CO521C-EN-P- May 2003
Email: [email protected]
PN957782-91
PLEASE FASTEN HERE (DO NOT STAPLE)
PLEASE FOLD HERE
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 18235 CLEVELAND OH
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE
PLEASE REMOVE
Other Comments
Rockwell Automation
Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to
assist you in using its products. At
http://support.rockwellautomation.com, you can find technical
manuals, a knowledge base of FAQs, technical and application notes,
sample code and links to software service packs, and a MySupport
feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools.
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation,
configuration, and troubleshooting, we offer TechConnect Support
programs. For more information, contact your local distributor or
Rockwell Automation representative, or visit
http://support.rockwellautomation.com.
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem with a hardware module within the first
24 hours of installation, please review the information that's contained
in this manual. You can also contact a special Customer Support
number for initial help in getting your module up and running.
United States
1.440.646.3223
Monday – Friday, 8am – 5pm EST
Outside United
States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for any
technical support issues.
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully
operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility. However,
if your product is not functioning, it may need to be returned.
Publication 1763-UM001B-EN-P - April 2007 264
Supersedes Publication 1763-UM001A-EN-P - August 2005
United States
Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case
number (see phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor in
order to complete the return process.
Outside United
States
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for
return procedure.
PN 40072-125-01(2)
Copyright © 2007 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
">